1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
\r
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
\r
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
\r
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
\r
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
\r
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
\r
13 % the documentation team
\r
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
\r
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
\r
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
\r
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
\r
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
\r
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
\r
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
\r
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
\r
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
\r
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
\r
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
\r
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
\r
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\r
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
\r
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
\r
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
\r
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
\r
42 % for customized page headers/footers
\r
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
\r
44 \usepackage{fancyhdr}
\r
45 % change header rule width
\r
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
\r
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
\r
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
\r
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
\r
51 %\let\OrgIndex\index
\r
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
\r
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
\r
55 \use_default_options false
\r
57 customHeadersFooters
\r
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
\r
62 \language_package default
\r
64 \fontencoding global
\r
67 \font_typewriter default
\r
69 \font_default_family default
\r
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
\r
76 \default_output_format default
\r
78 \bibtex_command default
\r
79 \index_command default
\r
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
\r
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
\r
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
\r
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
\r
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
\r
91 \pdf_breaklinks false
\r
92 \pdf_pdfborder false
\r
93 \pdf_colorlinks true
\r
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
\r
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\r
99 \use_package amsmath 1
\r
100 \use_package amssymb 1
\r
101 \use_package cancel 0
\r
102 \use_package esint 1
\r
103 \use_package mathdots 1
\r
104 \use_package mathtools 0
\r
105 \use_package mhchem 1
\r
106 \use_package stackrel 0
\r
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
\r
108 \use_package undertilde 0
\r
110 \cite_engine_type numerical
\r
111 \biblio_style plain
\r
112 \use_bibtopic false
\r
114 \paperorientation portrait
\r
115 \suppress_date false
\r
116 \justification true
\r
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
\r
135 \paragraph_separation indent
\r
136 \paragraph_indentation default
\r
137 \quotes_language english
\r
140 \paperpagestyle default
\r
141 \tracking_changes true
\r
142 \output_changes false
\r
143 \html_math_output 0
\r
144 \html_css_as_file 0
\r
145 \html_be_strict true
\r
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
\r
151 \begin_layout Title
\r
152 The LyX User's Guide
\r
155 \begin_layout Author
\r
160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
162 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
\r
163 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
\r
164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
166 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
\r
177 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
181 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
185 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
189 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
\r
190 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
195 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
\r
203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
204 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
\r
205 LatexCommand tableofcontents
\r
212 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
216 \begin_layout Section
\r
220 \begin_layout Standard
\r
221 LyX is a document preparation system.
\r
222 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
\r
223 scripts, publishable books, business
\r
224 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
\r
225 It is unlike most other
\r
226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
233 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
\r
235 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
\r
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
251 pt type, left justified, 5
\r
252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
260 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
\r
261 not with mechanics.
\r
264 \begin_layout Standard
\r
265 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
\r
270 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
\r
274 \begin_layout Standard
\r
279 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
\r
280 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
\r
281 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
\r
282 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
\r
288 manual describes that, too.
\r
291 \begin_layout Section
\r
295 \begin_layout Standard
\r
296 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
\r
298 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
\r
299 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
\r
303 \begin_layout Standard
\r
304 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
\r
305 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
\r
306 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
\r
308 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
\r
309 only a vertical scrollbar.
\r
310 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
\r
311 The first case is large images.
\r
312 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
\r
313 image and use the option
\r
319 LaTeX and LyX options
\r
322 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
\r
324 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
\r
325 this doesn't work for equations yet.
\r
328 \begin_layout Standard
\r
329 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
\r
331 \begin_inset space ~
\r
335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
337 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
\r
344 \begin_layout Section
\r
348 \begin_layout Standard
\r
349 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
\r
350 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
\r
351 Just select the manual you want to read from the
\r
358 \begin_layout Section
\r
360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
362 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
369 \begin_layout Standard
\r
370 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
\r
372 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
376 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
385 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
\r
386 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
\r
387 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
\r
389 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
\r
390 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
\r
391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
395 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
398 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
\r
399 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
\r
401 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
405 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
409 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
414 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
\r
417 \begin_layout Section
\r
419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
421 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
\r
428 \begin_layout Standard
\r
429 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
\r
430 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
\r
432 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
\r
433 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
\r
437 \begin_layout Standard
\r
438 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
\r
440 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
\r
441 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
\r
444 \begin_layout Standard
\r
445 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
\r
446 you can view from the menu
\r
448 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
461 \begin_inset space ~
\r
467 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
\r
468 reconfigure LyX (menu
\r
470 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
474 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
478 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
\r
479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
486 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
\r
487 More about TeX Code is described in section
\r
488 \begin_inset space ~
\r
492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
494 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
498 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
\r
499 \begin_inset space ~
\r
503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
505 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
\r
515 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
519 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
524 See section 5.1 of the
\r
528 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
\r
531 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
532 How to work with LyX
\r
535 \begin_layout Section
\r
536 Basic File Operations
\r
537 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
549 \begin_layout Standard
\r
554 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
\r
555 in addition to some more advanced operations:
\r
558 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
570 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
574 \begin_inset space ~
\r
578 \begin_inset space ~
\r
584 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
596 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
602 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
614 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
618 \begin_inset space ~
\r
624 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
632 \begin_inset space ~
\r
638 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
642 \begin_inset space ~
\r
648 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
654 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
660 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
666 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
672 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
678 \begin_layout Standard
\r
679 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
\r
680 a few minor differences.
\r
683 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
685 \begin_inset space ~
\r
689 \begin_inset space ~
\r
694 command lists the available templates.
\r
695 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
\r
696 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
\r
697 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
\r
699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
705 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
712 \begin_layout Standard
\r
713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
745 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
\r
746 space is just that — a big, blank space.
\r
754 \begin_layout Standard
\r
758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
762 \begin_inset space ~
\r
770 \begin_inset space ~
\r
775 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
\r
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
780 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
\r
782 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
\r
791 \begin_inset space ~
\r
795 \begin_inset space ~
\r
800 will reload the document from disk.
\r
801 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
\r
802 and want to restore it to the last save.
\r
806 \begin_inset space ~
\r
811 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
\r
812 them as your changes.
\r
815 \begin_layout Section
\r
816 Basic Editing Features
\r
817 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
829 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
836 \begin_layout Standard
\r
837 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
\r
838 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
\r
839 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
\r
840 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
\r
842 We will start with cut and paste.
\r
845 \begin_layout Standard
\r
846 As you might expect, the
\r
850 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
\r
851 various other editing features.
\r
852 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
\r
853 The basic ones are:
\r
856 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
870 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
884 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
898 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
902 \begin_inset space ~
\r
908 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
912 \begin_inset space ~
\r
918 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
922 \begin_inset space ~
\r
926 \begin_inset space ~
\r
934 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
\r
940 \begin_layout Standard
\r
941 The first three are self-explanatory.
\r
943 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
952 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
\r
956 \begin_inset space ~
\r
961 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
\r
964 \begin_layout Standard
\r
967 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
969 \begin_inset space ~
\r
972 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
974 \begin_inset space ~
\r
978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
982 \begin_inset space ~
\r
987 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
\r
989 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
\r
993 \begin_inset space ~
\r
998 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
\r
999 will start a new paragraph.
\r
1002 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1003 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1013 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1024 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1026 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1030 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1038 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1042 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1048 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
\r
1053 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
\r
1056 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1062 You can click the
\r
1065 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1070 button to skip the current word.
\r
1074 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1079 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
\r
1083 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1088 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
\r
1090 If the toggle is set, searching for
\r
1091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1095 \family typewriter
\r
1099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1102 will not match the word
\r
1103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1107 \family typewriter
\r
1111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1117 Match whole words only
\r
1119 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
\r
1120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1123 g., searching for
\r
1124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1128 \family typewriter
\r
1132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1140 \family typewriter
\r
1144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1148 LyX offers also an advanced
\r
1151 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1155 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1160 feature that is described in sec.
\r
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1167 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
1174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1175 Things like notes, floats, etc.
\r
1176 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1187 ) can be dissolved.
\r
1188 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
\r
1190 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
\r
1191 inset and pressing
\r
1195 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
\r
1202 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1203 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
\r
1206 arg "inset-select-all"
\r
1212 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
\r
1215 selects the whole document.
\r
1218 \begin_layout Section
\r
1220 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1230 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1241 LatexCommand label
\r
1242 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
\r
1249 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1250 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
\r
1251 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
\r
1254 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1257 or the toolbar button
\r
1263 to undo some mistake.
\r
1264 If you accidentally undo too much, use
\r
1266 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1269 or the toolbar button
\r
1276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1283 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
\r
1284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1287 steps to minimize memory overhead.
\r
1290 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1291 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
\r
1292 was last saved, the
\r
1293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1300 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
\r
1301 This is a consequence of the 100
\r
1302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1305 step undo limit mentioned above.
\r
1308 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1317 work on almost everything in LyX.
\r
1318 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
\r
1322 \begin_layout Section
\r
1324 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1336 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1337 These are the most basic mouse operations.
\r
1340 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1345 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1350 once anywhere in the edit window.
\r
1351 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
\r
1355 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1360 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1365 and drag the mouse.
\r
1366 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
\r
1369 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1372 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
\r
1375 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1376 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
\r
1378 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1385 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
1386 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
\r
1390 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1391 Right-click on them to set their properties.
\r
1392 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
\r
1396 \begin_layout Section
\r
1398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1399 LatexCommand label
\r
1400 name "sec:Navigating"
\r
1405 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1417 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1418 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
\r
1421 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1426 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
\r
1427 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
\r
1430 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1431 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
\r
1433 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1436 or by the toolbar button
\r
1439 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
\r
1445 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
1446 You can set bookmarks in your document under
\r
1448 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1451 and use the same menu to return to them.
\r
1452 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
\r
1455 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1456 The toolbar button
\r
1459 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
1464 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1465 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1467 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1472 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
\r
1473 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
\r
1474 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
\r
1475 your last editing position.
\r
1478 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1483 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
\r
1486 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
1488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1489 LatexCommand label
\r
1490 name "sub:The-Outliner"
\r
1497 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1498 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
\r
1499 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
\r
1500 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
\r
1502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1508 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
1512 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
\r
1513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1519 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
1524 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
\r
1528 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1529 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
\r
1530 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
\r
1531 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
\r
1532 dialog and to modify the citation.
\r
1535 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1536 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
\r
1538 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
\r
1539 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
\r
1540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1547 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
\r
1550 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1551 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
\r
1552 you further to control the display.
\r
1557 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
\r
1558 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
\r
1564 option keeps it in the current view state.
\r
1565 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
\r
1566 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1569 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
\r
1570 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1573 3, the subsections of sections
\r
1574 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1577 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
\r
1582 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
\r
1583 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1587 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
\r
1589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1597 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
\r
1600 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1602 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1606 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1607 filename ../images/reload.png
\r
1612 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1615 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
\r
1616 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
\r
1619 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1623 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1624 filename ../images/down.png
\r
1626 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1631 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1635 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
1639 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1640 filename ../images/up.png
\r
1642 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1647 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1650 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
\r
1651 So, for example, you can move section
\r
1652 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1655 2.5 before section
\r
1656 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1659 2.4 or after section
\r
1660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1664 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
\r
1666 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1667 filename ../images/promote.png
\r
1669 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1674 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
1675 filename ../images/demote.png
\r
1677 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
1681 (or the corresponding key bindings
\r
1689 ) you can change the level of sections.
\r
1690 So you can for example make section
\r
1691 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1695 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1699 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1705 \begin_layout Section
\r
1706 Input/Word Completion
\r
1707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
1708 LatexCommand label
\r
1709 name "sec:Input-Completion"
\r
1714 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1724 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1728 Word completion|see
\r
1732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1758 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1759 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
\r
1761 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
\r
1762 is used to propose completions.
\r
1765 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1766 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
\r
1768 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1773 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1780 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1784 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1789 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
\r
1793 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1798 the completions are always shown in a popup.
\r
1799 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
\r
1803 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1809 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
\r
1810 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
\r
1813 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1814 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
\r
1815 are completions available.
\r
1820 key to accept a proposed completion.
\r
1821 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
\r
1822 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
\r
1823 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
\r
1830 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1831 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
\r
1832 ing options for text.
\r
1833 The special math option
\r
1837 enables characters to be composed.
\r
1838 If, for example, you want to insert the character
\r
1839 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
\r
1842 , you can then input the characters
\r
1843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
1851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
1854 to a formula to get it.
\r
1855 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
\r
1856 of the math toolbar.
\r
1857 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
\r
1858 \family typewriter
\r
1861 that is in LyX's installation folder.
\r
1862 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
\r
1871 \begin_layout Section
\r
1872 Basic Key Bindings
\r
1873 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1883 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1915 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
1918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
1949 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1950 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
\r
1951 \family typewriter
\r
1955 \family typewriter
\r
1960 \family typewriter
\r
1963 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
\r
1965 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
1969 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
\r
1970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
1974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
1976 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
\r
1983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
1987 \begin_inset space ~
\r
1995 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2016 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
\r
2020 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2025 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2026 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2028 description "Tabulator key"
\r
2034 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
\r
2035 If you do not understand this, go read sections
\r
2036 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2042 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
\r
2047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2049 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
2053 , especially section
\r
2054 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
2060 reference "sub:Lists"
\r
2066 If you are still confused, look in the
\r
2071 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
2078 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
\r
2079 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
\r
2083 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2088 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2089 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2091 description "Escape key"
\r
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2105 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
\r
2106 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
\r
2109 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2116 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2120 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2127 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
\r
2128 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
\r
2129 or end of the file.
\r
2132 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2133 There are three modifier keys:
\r
2136 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2155 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2156 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2158 description "Control key"
\r
2162 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
\r
2163 on which keys it is used in combination with:
\r
2167 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2176 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
\r
2179 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2188 , it moves by words instead of characters.
\r
2191 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
2200 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
\r
2204 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2223 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2224 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2226 description "Shift key"
\r
2230 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
\r
2231 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
\r
2234 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
2235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
2241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2253 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
2254 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
2256 description "Alt or Meta key"
\r
2260 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
\r
2261 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
\r
2262 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
\r
2268 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
2271 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
\r
2273 menu accelerator keys
\r
2276 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
\r
2277 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
\r
2281 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2282 For example, the sequence
\r
2283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2289 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2293 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2342 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2347 manual lists all other things bound to the
\r
2355 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2356 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
\r
2357 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
\r
2358 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
\r
2359 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
\r
2360 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
\r
2361 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
\r
2362 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
\r
2364 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
\r
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2380 followed by a capital
\r
2387 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
2389 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2401 \begin_layout Section
\r
2403 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2415 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
2419 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2420 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
\r
2421 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
\r
2422 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
\r
2423 numbering schemes, and so on.
\r
2424 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
\r
2425 and format the title of your document differently.
\r
2428 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2433 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
\r
2434 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
\r
2435 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
\r
2436 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
\r
2437 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
\r
2440 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
2442 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2446 Document ! Classes
\r
2452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2453 LatexCommand label
\r
2454 name "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
2461 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2462 You can select a class using the
\r
2464 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2465 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2469 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2473 Document ! Settings
\r
2479 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
\r
2483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2487 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2488 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
\r
2492 \begin_layout Description
\r
2493 Article for basic articles
\r
2496 \begin_layout Description
\r
2497 Report for basic reports
\r
2500 \begin_layout Description
\r
2501 Book for writing a book
\r
2504 \begin_layout Description
\r
2505 Letter for US-style letters
\r
2508 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2509 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
\r
2510 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
\r
2511 will include many of these.
\r
2512 Here are some of the classes.
\r
2513 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
\r
2515 Special Document Classes
\r
2519 Additional Features
\r
2524 \begin_layout Description
\r
2525 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
\r
2528 \begin_layout Description
\r
2529 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
\r
2533 \begin_layout Description
\r
2534 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
\r
2538 \begin_layout Description
\r
2539 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
\r
2540 Mathematical Society (AMS).
\r
2541 There are three article layouts available.
\r
2542 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
\r
2543 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
\r
2544 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
\r
2545 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
\r
2547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2550 sequential numbering
\r
2551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2554 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
\r
2555 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
\r
2556 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
\r
2557 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
\r
2560 \begin_layout Description
\r
2561 Beamer Layout for presentations
\r
2564 \begin_layout Description
\r
2565 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
\r
2566 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
\r
2570 \begin_layout Description
\r
2571 Chess Layout to write about chess games
\r
2574 \begin_layout Description
\r
2576 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2579 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
\r
2582 \begin_layout Description
\r
2583 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
\r
2586 \begin_layout Description
\r
2587 Foils Used to make transparencies
\r
2590 \begin_layout Description
\r
2591 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
\r
2592 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
\r
2596 \begin_layout Description
\r
2597 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
\r
2598 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
\r
2601 \begin_layout Description
\r
2602 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
\r
2605 \begin_layout Description
\r
2606 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
\r
2609 \begin_layout Description
\r
2610 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
\r
2611 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
\r
2612 (Is used by this document.)
\r
2615 \begin_layout Description
\r
2616 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
\r
2619 \begin_layout Description
\r
2620 Powerdot Layout for presentations
\r
2623 \begin_layout Description
\r
2628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2635 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
\r
2636 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
\r
2638 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
\r
2641 \begin_layout Description
\r
2642 Slides Used to make transparencies
\r
2645 \begin_layout Description
\r
2647 \begin_inset space ~
\r
2650 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
\r
2651 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
\r
2654 \begin_layout Description
\r
2655 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
\r
2658 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2659 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
\r
2661 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
\r
2664 Additional Features
\r
2667 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
\r
2668 of the document classes.
\r
2671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2675 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2676 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
\r
2678 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2679 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2681 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2685 Document ! Settings
\r
2693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2701 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
\r
2702 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
\r
2704 So it may seem that something is wrong.
\r
2707 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2709 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
\r
2710 and some of them, like
\r
2714 , are highly specialized.
\r
2715 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
\r
2716 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
\r
2718 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
\r
2719 by some document class.
\r
2720 There are just too many of them.
\r
2721 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
\r
2724 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2725 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
\r
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2733 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
\r
2734 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
\r
2735 document class for a new file.
\r
2736 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
\r
2738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2741 Installing new LaTeX files
\r
2742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2749 manual for information on how to install them.
\r
2750 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
2756 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2757 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
\r
2758 does not include support for every document class people might want to
\r
2760 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
\r
2761 dissertations submitted to those universities.
\r
2762 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
\r
2763 There are too many.
\r
2764 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
\r
2768 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
\r
2774 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
\r
2777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2780 LatexCommand label
\r
2781 name "sub:Modules"
\r
2786 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2790 Document ! Modules
\r
2798 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2799 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
\r
2800 chosen document class.
\r
2801 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
\r
2802 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
\r
2803 ing module in the
\r
2809 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2813 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2817 Document ! Settings
\r
2823 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
\r
2827 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2828 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
\r
2829 always installed by default.
\r
2830 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
\r
2831 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
\r
2832 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
\r
2833 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
\r
2834 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
\r
2835 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
\r
2836 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
\r
2839 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
2843 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2847 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
2853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2856 Installing new LaTeX files
\r
2857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2864 manual for more information on installing required packages.
\r
2867 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2868 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
2871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2876 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
\r
2877 LyX will advise you about these things.
\r
2885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
2888 LatexCommand label
\r
2889 name "sub:Local-Layout"
\r
2894 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
2897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2898 Document ! Local Layout
\r
2906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2907 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
\r
2908 used in a variety of different documents.
\r
2909 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
\r
2910 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
\r
2911 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
\r
2912 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
\r
2913 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
\r
2914 What you want is LyX's
\r
2915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
2919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
2931 manual for information on how to use it.
\r
2934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
2938 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2939 Each class has a default set of options.
\r
2940 Here's a quick table describing them:
\r
2943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2944 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
2950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
2952 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
2953 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
\r
2954 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
2955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
2961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
2988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
2991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
3391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3413 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3414 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
3420 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3421 You're probably also wondering what
\r
3422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
3426 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
3434 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
\r
3435 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
\r
3440 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
\r
3445 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
\r
3455 headings, there are also
\r
3463 headings, and so on.
\r
3464 We will describe these headings fully in section
\r
3465 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3471 reference "sub:Headings"
\r
3478 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3481 LatexCommand label
\r
3482 name "sub:Document-Layout"
\r
3487 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3499 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3503 Document ! Settings
\r
3511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3512 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
\r
3514 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3521 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3529 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3534 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
\r
3536 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
\r
3537 to use for your document.
\r
3538 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
\r
3539 to read its manual.
\r
3542 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3546 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3553 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3559 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3564 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
\r
3565 You can choose between the following five options:
\r
3568 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3574 Use default page style of current class.
\r
3577 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3578 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3583 No page numbers or headings.
\r
3586 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3592 Page numbers only.
\r
3595 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3601 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
\r
3602 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
\r
3603 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
\r
3606 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3612 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
\r
3613 have the LaTeX-package
\r
3618 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3622 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
3628 How they are defined is explained in section
\r
3629 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3635 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
\r
3642 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3643 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
\r
3644 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
3650 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
\r
3657 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3658 Paper Size and Orientation
\r
3659 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3663 Document ! Paper size
\r
3669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3670 LatexCommand label
\r
3671 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
\r
3678 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3679 You can find the following options in the menu
\r
3682 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3689 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3695 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3699 Document ! Settings
\r
3707 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3712 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3717 What size paper to print on.
\r
3722 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3728 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3734 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3740 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3746 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3749 US letter, US legal, US executive
\r
3752 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3758 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
3765 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3771 To choose whether to output as
\r
3782 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
3783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
3787 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3792 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
\r
3793 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
\r
3796 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3799 LatexCommand label
\r
3800 name "sub:Margins"
\r
3805 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3809 Document ! Margins
\r
3815 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3827 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3828 Paper margins are set in the menu
\r
3830 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
3834 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3838 Document ! Settings
\r
3846 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3847 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
\r
3848 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
\r
3849 the paper format and the font size into account.
\r
3852 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3856 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3857 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
\r
3861 into the new class.
\r
3862 That includes the paragraph environments.
\r
3863 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
\r
3864 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
\r
3865 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
\r
3866 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
\r
3867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
3871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
3875 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
\r
3877 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
\r
3878 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
\r
3879 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
\r
3882 \begin_layout Section
\r
3883 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
\r
3884 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3888 Paragraph ! Indentation
\r
3896 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3899 LatexCommand label
\r
3900 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
\r
3907 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3908 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
\r
3909 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
\r
3912 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3913 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
\r
3914 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
\r
3915 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
\r
3916 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
\r
3920 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
\r
3926 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
\r
3927 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
\r
3928 language than English.
\r
3929 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
\r
3933 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3934 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
\r
3935 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
\r
3937 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
\r
3938 LyX takes care of that.
\r
3939 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
\r
3941 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
\r
3942 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
\r
3943 of a page, and so on.
\r
3947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3948 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
\r
3953 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
\r
3954 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
\r
3958 these pre-coded spacings.
\r
3959 We will explain more later.
\r
3962 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
3963 Paragraph Separation
\r
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
3965 LatexCommand label
\r
3966 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
\r
3971 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
3975 Paragraph ! Separation
\r
3983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
3991 \begin_inset space ~
\r
3999 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4010 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4014 Document ! Settings
\r
4019 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
\r
4022 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4026 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4027 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
\r
4030 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4032 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4037 dialog and toggle the
\r
4040 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4045 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
\r
4048 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
\r
4052 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
\r
4053 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
\r
4057 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4058 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
\r
4059 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
\r
4062 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4064 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4068 Paragraph ! Line spacing
\r
4076 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4079 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4083 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4087 Document ! Settings
\r
4095 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
\r
4099 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4109 You need to have the LaTeX-package
\r
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4118 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
\r
4123 installed to use this feature.
\r
4128 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
\r
4130 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4132 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4137 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
\r
4138 is normally defined in the environment's style.
\r
4141 \begin_layout Section
\r
4142 Paragraph Environments
\r
4143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4144 LatexCommand label
\r
4145 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4154 Paragraph ! Environments
\r
4160 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4164 Paragraph environments|(
\r
4172 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4176 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4177 Paragraph environments correspond to the
\r
4180 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4199 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
4202 command sequence in LaTeX files.
\r
4203 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
\r
4204 alien to you, we urge you to read the
\r
4213 also contains many more examples than this section does.
\r
4216 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4217 A paragraph environment is simply a
\r
4218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4225 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
\r
4226 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
\r
4227 scheme, labels, and so on.
\r
4228 Additionally, you can
\r
4229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4236 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
\r
4237 to inherit some of the properties of another.
\r
4238 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
\r
4239 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
\r
4241 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
\r
4243 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
\r
4246 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4247 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
\r
4248 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
4249 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
\r
4255 at the left end of the toolbar.
\r
4256 LyX will change the environment of the
\r
4260 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
\r
4261 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
\r
4262 you select them before choosing the new environment.
\r
4266 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4267 Note that entering
\r
4275 create a new paragraph using the
\r
4279 paragraph environment.
\r
4281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4288 because if you are in one of these environments:
\r
4291 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4297 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4303 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4309 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4315 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4321 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4327 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4333 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4334 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
\r
4338 , rather than resetting it to
\r
4343 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
\r
4344 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
4350 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
4357 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4361 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4362 The default paragraph environment is
\r
4367 It creates a plain paragraph.
\r
4368 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
\r
4369 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
\r
4370 this manual) are in the
\r
4377 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4378 You can nest a paragraph using the
\r
4382 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
\r
4390 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4392 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4404 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4405 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
\r
4407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4414 for thanks or contact information.
\r
4415 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
\r
4416 page along with today's date.
\r
4417 For other types of documents, the title
\r
4418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4425 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
\r
4429 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4430 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
\r
4444 Here's how you use them:
\r
4447 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4448 Put the title of your document in the
\r
4455 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4456 Put the author name in the
\r
4463 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4464 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
\r
4465 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
\r
4471 Note that using this environment is optional.
\r
4472 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
\r
4473 If you don't want a date, use the option
\r
4475 Suppress default date on front page
\r
4479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4480 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4482 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4490 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4491 You can use footnotes to insert
\r
4492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4499 or contact information.
\r
4502 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4504 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4515 LatexCommand label
\r
4516 name "sub:Headings"
\r
4523 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4524 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
\r
4525 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
\r
4528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4534 Section headings ! Numbered
\r
4542 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4543 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
\r
4547 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4553 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4559 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4565 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4571 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4577 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4583 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
4589 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4590 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
\r
4591 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
\r
4592 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
\r
4595 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4596 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
\r
4597 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
\r
4598 You group the book into chapters.
\r
4599 LyX does a similar grouping:
\r
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4607 is divided into either
\r
4618 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4623 s are divided into
\r
4630 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4635 s are divided into
\r
4642 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4647 s are divided into
\r
4654 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4659 s are divided into
\r
4666 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4671 s are divided into
\r
4678 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4679 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
4682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4687 Not all document types use the
\r
4691 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
\r
4696 is the top-level heading.
\r
4704 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4705 So, if you use the
\r
4709 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
\r
4710 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
\r
4712 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
\r
4714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4725 Unnumbered Headings
\r
4726 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4730 Section headings ! Unnumbered
\r
4738 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4739 The unnumbered section headings have a
\r
4740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4747 at the end of their name.
\r
4748 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
\r
4749 the table of contents, see section
\r
4750 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
4756 reference "sec:toc"
\r
4763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4764 Changing the Numbering
\r
4765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4766 LatexCommand label
\r
4767 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
4774 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4775 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
\r
4776 in the Table of Contents.
\r
4777 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
\r
4779 Just as certain classes start with
\r
4783 and go down to the
\r
4793 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
\r
4794 Most don't number
\r
4803 This is something you can change.
\r
4806 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4809 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4813 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4817 Document ! Settings
\r
4825 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4829 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4834 you will see two counters.
\r
4839 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
\r
4841 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
\r
4845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4846 Short Titles of Headings
\r
4847 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
4850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4851 Section headings ! Short titles
\r
4857 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
4860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
4867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
4868 LatexCommand label
\r
4869 name "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
4876 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4877 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
\r
4878 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
\r
4879 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
\r
4880 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
\r
4883 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4884 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
\r
4885 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
\r
4886 avoiding the problem mentioned.
\r
4887 To specify a short title, use the menu
\r
4889 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
4891 \begin_inset space ~
\r
4897 This will insert a box labeled
\r
4898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
4910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
4913 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
\r
4914 This also works for captions inside floats.
\r
4917 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4918 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
\r
4921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
4922 Special Information
\r
4925 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4926 The following information applies to all section headings:
\r
4929 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4930 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
\r
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4934 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
\r
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4938 You can only use inline math in these environments.
\r
4941 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
4942 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
\r
4945 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
4946 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
\r
4949 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4950 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
\r
4964 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
\r
4965 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
\r
4966 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
\r
4967 the text they contain.
\r
4968 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
\r
4976 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
\r
4979 \begin_layout Standard
\r
4980 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
\r
4989 when you start a new paragraph.
\r
4990 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
\r
4994 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
\r
4995 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
\r
4996 have to change back to the
\r
5000 environment yourself.
\r
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5014 LatexCommand label
\r
5020 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5032 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5033 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
\r
5034 time for the differences.
\r
5043 are identical except for one difference:
\r
5047 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
\r
5056 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
\r
5059 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5060 Here's an example of the
\r
5067 \begin_layout Quote
\r
5073 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
\r
5075 See – no indentation!
\r
5078 \begin_layout Quote
\r
5079 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
\r
5080 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
\r
5081 the other paragraph.
\r
5084 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5085 Here's another example, this time in the
\r
5092 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
5098 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
\r
5099 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
\r
5100 the first line, then
\r
5104 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
\r
5108 you were quoting other text.
\r
5111 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
5112 Here's a new paragraph.
\r
5113 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
\r
5114 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
\r
5117 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5118 As the examples show,
\r
5122 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
\r
5123 They should put quotes in the
\r
5128 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
\r
5132 paragraph environment for quoted text.
\r
5135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5141 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5153 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5164 LatexCommand label
\r
5172 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5177 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
\r
5178 Here's an example:
\r
5181 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5183 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5186 Which I did not rehearse!
\r
5189 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5190 It could be much worse.
\r
5191 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
\r
5193 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
\r
5194 indented a bit more than the first.
\r
5195 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
\r
5199 \begin_layout Verse
\r
5201 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5204 And make things look fine
\r
5205 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5211 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
5217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5222 does not indent both margins.
\r
5223 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
\r
5224 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
\r
5225 \family typewriter
\r
5231 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
5237 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
5239 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5250 LatexCommand label
\r
5258 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5259 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
\r
5269 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
\r
5278 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
\r
5279 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
\r
5280 describing some general features of all four of them.
\r
5283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5287 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5288 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
\r
5290 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
\r
5299 reset the environment to
\r
5303 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
\r
5304 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
\r
5305 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
\r
5306 depth, you can use
\r
5309 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
5313 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
\r
5320 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5321 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
\r
5322 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
\r
5324 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
\r
5325 you read all of section
\r
5326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5332 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5345 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5356 LatexCommand label
\r
5357 name "sec:Itemize"
\r
5364 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5365 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
\r
5369 paragraph environment.
\r
5370 It has the following properties:
\r
5373 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5374 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
\r
5378 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5379 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
\r
5382 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5383 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
\r
5387 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5388 The items can have any length.
\r
5389 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
\r
5390 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
\r
5397 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5402 environment inside another
\r
5406 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
\r
5410 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5411 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
\r
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5415 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
\r
5418 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5420 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5426 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5430 for a full explanation of nesting.
\r
5434 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5435 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
\r
5444 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
\r
5447 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5448 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
\r
5449 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
\r
5452 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5453 The label for the first level
\r
5457 is a large black dot, or bullet.
\r
5461 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5462 The label for the second level is a dash.
\r
5466 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5467 The label for the third is an asterisk.
\r
5471 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5472 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
\r
5476 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5477 Back out to the third level.
\r
5481 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5482 Back to the second level.
\r
5486 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
5487 Back to the outermost level.
\r
5490 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5491 These are the default labels for an
\r
5496 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
\r
5498 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5501 dialog in the submenu
\r
5506 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5510 Document ! Settings
\r
5515 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
\r
5518 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5519 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
\r
5520 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
\r
5522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5528 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5541 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
5552 LatexCommand label
\r
5553 name "sec:Enumerate"
\r
5560 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5565 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
\r
5566 It has these properties:
\r
5569 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5570 Each item has a numeral as its label.
\r
5574 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5575 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
\r
5579 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5580 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
\r
5583 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5588 environment resets the counter to one.
\r
5591 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5604 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5605 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
\r
5606 Items can have any length.
\r
5609 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5610 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
\r
5613 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5614 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
\r
5617 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5618 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
\r
5622 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5631 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
\r
5632 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
\r
5639 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5640 The first level of an
\r
5644 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
\r
5648 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5649 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
\r
5653 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5654 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
\r
5658 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5659 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
\r
5662 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5663 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
\r
5668 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5669 Back to the third level
\r
5673 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5674 Back to the second level.
\r
5678 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
5679 Back to the outermost level.
\r
5682 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5683 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
\r
5687 environment, see section
\r
5688 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5694 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
\r
5699 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
\r
5702 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5703 There is more to nesting
\r
5707 environments than we've stated here.
\r
5708 You should read section
\r
5709 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5715 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
5719 to learn more about nesting.
\r
5722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5728 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5732 Lists ! Description
\r
5740 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5741 Unlike the previous two environments, the
\r
5745 list has no fixed label.
\r
5746 Instead, LyX uses the first
\r
5747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5754 of the first line as the label.
\r
5755 Here's an example:
\r
5758 \begin_layout Description
\r
5759 Example: This is an example of the
\r
5766 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5767 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
\r
5771 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5780 it is meant that the first usage of the
\r
5784 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
\r
5786 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
\r
5794 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
5799 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5800 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5802 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5808 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
5814 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
5818 for more information.) Here is an example:
\r
5821 \begin_layout Description
\r
5823 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5826 Example: This one shows how to use a
\r
5829 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5834 in the label of a
\r
5841 \begin_layout Description
\r
5842 Usage: You should use the
\r
5846 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
\r
5847 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
\r
5848 that describes it.
\r
5849 It's not a good idea to use a
\r
5853 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
\r
5854 You're better off using
\r
5862 and nesting several
\r
5866 paragraphs into them.
\r
5869 \begin_layout Description
\r
5870 Nesting: You can nest
\r
5874 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
\r
5878 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5879 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
\r
5880 them from the first line.
\r
5883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
5885 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
5888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
5897 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5902 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
\r
5905 \begin_layout Standard
\r
5914 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
\r
5916 Here are its properties:
\r
5919 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5922 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5925 labels LyX uses the first
\r
5926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5933 of each line as the item label.
\r
5938 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
\r
5939 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
\r
5940 space as described above.
\r
5943 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5945 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
\r
5946 the body of the item text.
\r
5947 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
\r
5948 label width plus a little extra space.
\r
5952 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5955 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5958 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
\r
5960 If the label width is larger, the label
\r
5961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
5965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
5968 into the first line.
\r
5969 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
\r
5970 margin of the rest of the item text.
\r
5973 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
5974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
5976 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5979 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
\r
5984 environment has the same left margin.
\r
5985 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
5988 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
\r
5991 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
5993 \begin_inset space ~
\r
5998 dialog (toolbar button
\r
6001 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
6005 The text in the box
\r
6008 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6013 determines the default label width.
\r
6014 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
\r
6016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6023 multiple times instead.
\r
6024 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
\r
6026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6033 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
\r
6036 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6041 every time you alter a label in a
\r
6046 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6049 The predefined default width is the length of
\r
6050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6058 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6064 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6065 You should use the
\r
6069 list the same way as the
\r
6073 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
\r
6079 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
\r
6083 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6088 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
\r
6089 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
\r
6091 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6097 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
6101 to learn about nesting.
\r
6104 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6105 There is yet another feature of the
\r
6109 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
\r
6111 You can use additional
\r
6115 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
\r
6120 are documented in section
\r
6121 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6127 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
6132 Here are some examples:
\r
6135 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6137 Left The default for
\r
6144 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6146 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6153 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
\r
6156 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
6157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
6158 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6162 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
6169 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
\r
6172 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
6174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
6175 LatexCommand label
\r
6176 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
\r
6181 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6185 Lists ! Customized
\r
6193 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6194 The features described in this section require that the module
\r
6196 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
\r
6198 is loaded in the document settings.
\r
6199 The module uses the LaTeX-package
\r
6204 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6208 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6216 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6217 Custom Enumerate Lists
\r
6218 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6222 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
\r
6230 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6232 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
\r
6235 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
6238 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
\r
6239 There you add the command
\r
6242 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6250 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6251 in TeX Code (shortcut
\r
6261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6262 For more about TeX Code, look at section
\r
6263 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
6269 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
6282 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
\r
6289 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
\r
6290 For capital Roman numerals replace
\r
6302 in the command above.
\r
6303 For Arabic numerals use
\r
6311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
6315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
6318 items with capital or small Latin letters use
\r
6333 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6335 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6343 You can only number 26
\r
6344 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6347 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
\r
6355 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6356 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
\r
6357 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
\r
6360 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6361 Here is a list with custom numbering:
\r
6364 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6365 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6394 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6395 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6421 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6426 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6427 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6454 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6455 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6484 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6485 For this list these commands were used:
\r
6488 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6507 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6515 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
6525 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6526 where the command
\r
6532 makes the label emphasized and
\r
6541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6550 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
\r
6551 lists until you change the definition.
\r
6559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6560 Resumed Enumeration
\r
6561 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6565 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
\r
6573 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6574 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
\r
6577 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6578 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6600 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
6603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6604 goes back to default numbering
\r
6612 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6616 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6620 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
\r
6624 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6625 To resume an enumeration, use the style
\r
6630 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
\r
6631 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
\r
6634 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6635 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
6638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6643 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
\r
6651 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6652 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
\r
6654 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
\r
6655 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
\r
6656 of a normal enumeration.
\r
6657 There, insert the command
\r
6660 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6666 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6671 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
\r
6675 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6679 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6683 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6684 Enumeration starting at a given value:
\r
6687 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6688 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6707 This enumeration starts at 4
\r
6710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6712 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6724 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6725 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
\r
6727 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
\r
6730 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6734 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6735 with standard spacing
\r
6738 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6739 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
\r
6741 Add there the command
\r
6745 to get no additional list space like in this example:
\r
6748 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6749 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6771 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6772 without additional
\r
6775 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
6779 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6780 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
6786 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6790 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6796 For more information see its documentation,
\r
6797 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
6806 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6807 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
\r
6809 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
\r
6810 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
\r
6811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
6814 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
\r
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6818 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6829 parindent, labelsep=2cm
\r
6842 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
6843 with negative indentation
\r
6846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6847 Further Customization
\r
6848 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6852 Lists ! Customization
\r
6860 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6861 You can also change the style of description lists.
\r
6865 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6871 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6872 changes the description label font, the command
\r
6875 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6881 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6882 sets the list style.
\r
6885 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6886 An example where the command
\r
6889 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6894 itshape, style=nextline
\r
6897 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6901 \begin_layout Description
\r
6903 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6907 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6916 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
\r
6918 itshape, style=nextline
\r
6928 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
\r
6929 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
\r
6933 \begin_layout Description
\r
6935 \begin_inset space ~
\r
6938 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
\r
6939 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
\r
6940 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
\r
6943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
6944 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
6950 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6954 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
6960 For more information see its documentation
\r
6961 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
6970 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
6972 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
6975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
6984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
6992 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7000 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7001 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
\r
7002 environments called
\r
7009 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7015 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
\r
7016 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
\r
7017 In contrast, you can use the
\r
7024 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7029 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
\r
7030 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
\r
7034 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7035 Of course, you're not limited to using
\r
7042 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7051 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7056 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
\r
7057 some European academic papers.
\r
7060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7063 LatexCommand label
\r
7064 name "sec:Address-Usage"
\r
7071 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7076 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
\r
7077 for the opening and signature in some countries.
\r
7081 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7086 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
\r
7087 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
\r
7088 Here's an example of each:
\r
7091 \begin_layout Right Address
\r
7093 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7097 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7101 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7104 When is it? What is today?
\r
7107 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7111 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7117 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
\r
7118 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
\r
7119 Here's an example of the
\r
7126 \begin_layout Address
\r
7128 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7131 Where do I send this
\r
7132 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
7135 Your post office and country
\r
7138 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7139 As you can see, both
\r
7146 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7151 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
\r
7156 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
\r
7157 the environment to
\r
7162 This makes sense, since
\r
7167 \family typewriter
\r
7170 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
\r
7171 Thus, you have to use
\r
7172 \family typewriter
\r
7178 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7183 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7184 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7186 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7190 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7195 ) to start a new line in an
\r
7202 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7210 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7214 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7215 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
\r
7216 or list of references.
\r
7217 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
\r
7220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7224 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7236 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7241 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
\r
7242 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
\r
7243 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
\r
7244 Also, don't bother trying to nest
\r
7248 in anything else or
\r
7258 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
\r
7259 The book document classes ignores the
\r
7263 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
\r
7267 in a letter document class.
\r
7270 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7275 environment does several things for you.
\r
7276 First, it puts the centered label
\r
7277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7285 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
\r
7287 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
\r
7288 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
\r
7289 the subsequent text.
\r
7290 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
\r
7291 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
\r
7295 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7296 Starting a new paragraph by entering
\r
7300 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7301 The new paragraph will still be in the
\r
7306 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
\r
7307 finish entering the abstract of your document.
\r
7310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7311 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7318 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
7319 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
\r
7326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7327 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7331 LatexCommand label
\r
7332 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
\r
7353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7354 We would love to demonstrate the
\r
7358 environment, but since this document is in the
\r
7359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7366 class, we can't do this.
\r
7367 We inserted it therefore as figure
\r
7368 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
7374 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
\r
7379 If you have never heard of an
\r
7380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7387 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
\r
7390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
7396 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7407 LatexCommand label
\r
7408 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
\r
7415 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7420 environment is used to list references.
\r
7421 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
\r
7422 only use it at the end of the document.
\r
7427 in anything else or
\r
7434 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7435 When you first open a
\r
7439 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
\r
7440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7455 depending on the document class.
\r
7456 The heading is in a large boldface font.
\r
7457 Each paragraph of the
\r
7461 environment is a bibliography entry.
\r
7466 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7467 Each new paragraph is still in the
\r
7474 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7475 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
\r
7476 by using a BibTeX database.
\r
7477 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
\r
7478 phy handling, have a look at section
\r
7479 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
7485 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
7492 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7496 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7500 Paragraph ! LyX code
\r
7506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7507 LatexCommand label
\r
7508 name "sub:LyX-Code"
\r
7515 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7520 environment is another LyX extension.
\r
7521 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
\r
7522 It also treats the
\r
7526 key as a fixed whitespace;
\r
7530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7539 key is treated as a
\r
7542 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7547 instead of an end-of-word marker.
\r
7552 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
\r
7553 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
\r
7556 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7560 \family typewriter
\r
7568 breaks paragraphs.
\r
7569 Note, however, that
\r
7573 does not reset the paragraph environment.
\r
7574 So, when you finish using the
\r
7578 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
\r
7579 Also, you can nest the
\r
7583 environment inside of others.
\r
7586 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7587 There are a few quirks with this environment:
\r
7590 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7594 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7597 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
\r
7598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
7602 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
7612 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7618 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7619 You can't follow a
\r
7622 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
7633 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7638 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
\r
7645 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7649 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
7656 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7657 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
\r
7658 You must put at least one
\r
7662 in any line you want blank.
\r
7663 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
\r
7666 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7667 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
\r
7671 since that will insert
\r
7676 You get the typewriter double quotes with
\r
7679 arg "self-insert \""
\r
7685 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7686 Here is an example:
\r
7689 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7690 #include <stdio.h>
\r
7693 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7705 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7706 printf("Hello World!
\r
7711 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7715 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
7719 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7720 This is just the standard
\r
7721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7732 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7737 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
\r
7738 rc-files, and so on.
\r
7739 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
\r
7740 as if you used a typewriter.
\r
7741 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7745 Paragraph environments|)
\r
7750 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
\r
7753 Program Code Listings
\r
7758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7766 \begin_layout Section
\r
7767 Nesting Environments
\r
7768 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
7771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
7772 Nesting ! Environments
\r
7778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
7779 LatexCommand label
\r
7780 name "sec:Nesting"
\r
7787 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7791 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7792 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
\r
7794 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
\r
7796 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
\r
7797 has two subpoints.
\r
7798 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
\r
7800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
7804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
7810 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7814 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7819 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7823 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7828 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
7832 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7833 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
\r
7834 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
\r
7836 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
7838 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7850 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7854 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7859 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
\r
7861 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
\r
7864 arg "depth-increment"
\r
7870 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
7873 or the key bindings
\r
7884 arg "depth-increment"
\r
7890 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
7894 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
\r
7895 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
\r
7899 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7900 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
\r
7901 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
\r
7902 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
\r
7903 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
\r
7906 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7907 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
\r
7908 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
\r
7909 about to find out.
\r
7910 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
\r
7913 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
7914 What You Can and Can't Nest
\r
7917 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7918 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
\r
7919 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
\r
7922 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7923 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
\r
7924 than a simple yes or no.
\r
7925 There are three types of paragraph environments:
\r
7928 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7929 Completely unnestable
\r
7932 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7933 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
\r
7934 things inside them.
\r
7937 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7938 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
\r
7939 anything into them.
\r
7942 \begin_layout Standard
\r
7943 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
\r
7944 environments have them:
\r
7947 \begin_layout Description
\r
7948 Unnestable Can't nest them.
\r
7949 Can't nest into them.
\r
7953 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7959 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7965 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7971 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7977 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
7984 \begin_layout Description
\r
7986 \begin_inset space ~
\r
7989 Nestable You can nest them.
\r
7990 You can nest other things into them.
\r
7994 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8000 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8006 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8012 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8024 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8030 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8036 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8043 \begin_layout Description
\r
8044 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
\r
8045 You can't nest anything into them.
\r
8049 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8055 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8061 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8067 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8073 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8079 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8085 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8091 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8097 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8103 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8109 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8115 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8121 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8131 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8137 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8144 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8145 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
8148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8153 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
\r
8163 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8166 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
\r
8167 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
\r
8168 nested section headings violate this.
\r
8176 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8177 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
\r
8178 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
8181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8182 Nesting ! Tables etc.
\r
8190 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8191 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
\r
8192 affected by nesting anyhow.
\r
8196 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8200 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8204 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8208 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
8213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8218 Figures and tables in
\r
8222 are not affected by this.
\r
8227 Have a look at section
\r
8228 \begin_inset space ~
\r
8232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
8234 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
8238 for more information about
\r
8245 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8246 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
\r
8247 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
\r
8251 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8252 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
\r
8253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8260 of its own, it behaves just like a
\r
8261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8268 paragraph environment.
\r
8269 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
\r
8273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8274 Here's an example with a table:
\r
8277 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8282 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8283 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8287 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8294 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8296 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8297 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8298 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8384 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8385 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8392 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8394 The table is actually nested inside (a).
\r
8398 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8402 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8403 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
\r
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8411 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8412 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8417 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8423 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8425 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8426 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8427 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8428 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8429 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8513 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8514 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8520 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8526 nested inside (a).
\r
8527 In fact, it's not nested at all.
\r
8530 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8534 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8535 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
\r
8536 item of a new list!
\r
8539 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8540 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
\r
8542 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
\r
8545 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8550 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8551 This is (a) and it's nested.
\r
8554 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8555 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8561 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8563 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
8564 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
8565 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
8566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
8569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
8628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8652 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8653 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
8659 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8661 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
\r
8668 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8672 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8673 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
\r
8679 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
\r
8680 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
\r
8684 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8685 Usage and General Features
\r
8688 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8689 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
\r
8691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8698 is the innermost possible depth.
\r
8699 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
\r
8702 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8703 level #1 – outermost
\r
8707 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8712 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8717 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
8736 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8737 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
\r
8738 both of them in the example.
\r
8739 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
\r
8749 For example, if we tried to nest another
\r
8754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8761 , we would get errors.
\r
8764 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
8766 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
8770 Nesting ! Examples
\r
8778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8779 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
\r
8780 We have several examples of nested environments.
\r
8781 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
\r
8785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
8786 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
\r
8789 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8790 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8791 #1-a This is the outermost level.
\r
8800 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8801 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8802 #2-a This is level #2.
\r
8803 We created it by using
\r
8806 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8812 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8819 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8820 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8821 #3-a This is level #3.
\r
8822 This time, we just enter
\r
8829 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8833 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
\r
8837 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8843 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8850 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8851 This is actually a
\r
8855 environment, nested inside of
\r
8856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8864 So, it's at level #4.
\r
8865 We did this by entering
\r
8868 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8874 arg "depth-increment"
\r
8877 , then changing the paragraph environment to
\r
8882 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
\r
8898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
8903 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
\r
8906 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8912 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8913 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8914 #4-a This is level #4.
\r
8918 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8921 and changed the paragraph environment back to
\r
8926 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
\r
8930 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
\r
8935 keep nesting things inside
\r
8936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
8940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
8947 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8948 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8949 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
8954 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8955 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8956 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
8957 and this is level #6.
\r
8958 By now, you should know how we made these two.
\r
8962 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8963 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8964 #5-b Back to level #5.
\r
8968 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8974 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
8981 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
8982 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
8983 #4-b After another
\r
8986 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
8992 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
8995 , we're back at level #4.
\r
8999 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9000 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9001 #3-b Back to level #3.
\r
9002 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
\r
9006 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9007 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9008 #2-b Back to level #2.
\r
9013 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
9014 \labelwidthstring MMM
\r
9015 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
\r
9016 After this sentence, we will enter
\r
9020 and change the paragraph environment back to
\r
9027 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9028 We could have also used the
\r
9044 environment in place of the
\r
9049 The example would have worked exactly the same.
\r
9052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9053 Example 2: Inheritance
\r
9056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
9057 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
\r
9060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
\r
9062 Now we will enter
\r
9069 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9073 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9076 which, we will change to the
\r
9084 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9089 environment, at level #2.
\r
9092 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9093 Notice how the nested
\r
9097 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
\r
9101 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
\r
9105 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9106 We ended this example by entering
\r
9111 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
\r
9115 and reset the nesting depth by using
\r
9118 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9125 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
\r
9134 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
9137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9138 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
\r
9146 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9147 This is level #1, in an
\r
9151 paragraph environment.
\r
9152 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
\r
9156 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9161 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9167 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9171 Now, what happens if we nest an
\r
9175 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
\r
9176 label be? An asterisk?
\r
9180 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
9181 No! It's a bullet.
\r
9190 environment, even though it's at level #3.
\r
9191 So, its label is a bullet.
\r
9192 (We got here by using
\r
9195 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9201 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9204 , then changing the environment to
\r
9212 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
9213 Here's level #4, produced using
\r
9216 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9222 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9226 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
9231 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9232 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
9233 to get to level #5.
\r
9234 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
\r
9239 Notice the type of numbering, it is
\r
9243 , because we are in the
\r
9251 environment (that is, it is an
\r
9266 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9267 What happens if we
\r
9271 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
\r
9272 type of numbering does LyX use?
\r
9275 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9276 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
\r
9279 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9282 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
\r
9285 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9289 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9292 to decrease the depth after the next
\r
9295 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9302 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9304 Look what type of label LyX is using!
\r
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9310 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
\r
9311 numeral as the label.Why?
\r
9314 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9315 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
\r
9324 Notice, however, that LyX
\r
9328 reset the counter for the label.
\r
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9336 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9342 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9345 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
\r
9346 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
\r
9347 into the twofold-nested
\r
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9356 The same thing happens if we do another
\r
9359 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9365 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9368 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
\r
9371 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9372 Lastly, we reset the environment to
\r
9377 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
\r
9387 The number of other
\r
9391 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
\r
9397 The same rule applies for the
\r
9401 environment, as well.
\r
9404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9405 Example 4: Going Bonkers
\r
9408 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9409 We're going to go totally nuts now.
\r
9410 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
\r
9411 the same detail with how we did it.
\r
9420 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9428 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9435 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
\r
9436 the example in parentheses someplace.
\r
9437 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
\r
9438 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
\r
9439 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
\r
9443 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9448 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
\r
9452 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9453 Now we will add verse.
\r
9454 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9457 It will get much worse.
\r
9458 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9468 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9478 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9479 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
\r
9480 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9483 Bippitey boppitey boo!
\r
9484 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9490 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9498 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9499 Here comes a table:
\r
9503 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9504 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
\r
9510 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9512 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
9513 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
9514 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
9515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
9516 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
9518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
9521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
9577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9601 \begin_layout Verse
\r
9605 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9615 arg "depth-increment"
\r
9621 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9631 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
9638 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
9643 : level #1) This is another item.
\r
9644 Note that selecting a
\r
9648 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
\r
9649 3 times to put the table inside the
\r
9657 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9658 We're now ending the
\r
9662 list and changing to
\r
9667 We're still at level #1.
\r
9668 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
\r
9669 The next set of paragraphs is a
\r
9670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9677 We will nest both the
\r
9684 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9689 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
\r
9693 for the letter body.
\r
9697 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
\r
9700 to preserve the depth.
\r
9701 Remember that you need to use
\r
9704 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
9707 to create multiple lines inside the
\r
9714 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9724 \begin_layout Right Address
\r
9726 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9729 Moosegroin, MT 00100
\r
9730 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9736 \begin_layout Address
\r
9738 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9744 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9745 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
\r
9746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
9749 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
\r
9750 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
\r
9751 a backlog in our orders for methane.
\r
9752 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
\r
9753 as soon as possible.
\r
9754 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
\r
9757 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9758 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
\r
9759 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
\r
9760 with your order, along with payment.
\r
9763 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9764 We thank you again for your patience.
\r
9767 \begin_layout Address
\r
9769 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9776 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
9777 That ends that example!
\r
9780 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9781 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
\r
9782 just a few keystrokes.
\r
9783 We could have easily nested an
\r
9804 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
\r
9807 \begin_layout Section
\r
9808 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
\r
9809 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9821 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9822 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
\r
9823 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
\r
9824 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
\r
9825 be broken at the end of a line.
\r
9826 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
\r
9830 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
9832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9833 LatexCommand label
\r
9834 name "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
9839 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9843 Spaces ! Protected
\r
9851 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9852 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
\r
9853 line at that point.
\r
9854 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
\r
9857 \begin_layout Quote
\r
9858 Further documentation is given in section
\r
9859 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
9863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9865 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
9873 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9874 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
\r
9875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
9887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9889 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
9894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
9898 A protected space is set with
\r
9900 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9901 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9903 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9911 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
9917 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
9919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9920 LatexCommand label
\r
9921 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
9926 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9930 Spacing ! Horizontal
\r
9938 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9939 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
\r
9941 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9942 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
9946 The length units are listed in Appendix
\r
9947 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9953 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
9960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
9962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
9963 LatexCommand label
\r
9964 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
9969 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
9972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
9973 Spaces ! Inter-word
\r
9981 \begin_layout Standard
\r
9982 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
\r
9983 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
\r
9984 at the ends of sentences.
\r
9985 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
\r
9986 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
\r
9987 followed by a period; see section
\r
9988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
9992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
9994 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
9999 To insert a normal space, select
\r
10001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10002 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10004 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10010 \begin_inset Info
\r
10012 arg "space-insert normal"
\r
10018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10021 LatexCommand label
\r
10022 name "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
10027 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10039 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10048 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
\r
10049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10057 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
\r
10058 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
\r
10059 inside abbreviations:
\r
10062 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10068 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
\r
10071 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10072 or between values and units.
\r
10073 Compare for example this:
\r
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10082 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10085 10 kg (normal space
\r
10088 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10089 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
\r
10091 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10092 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10094 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10100 \begin_inset Info
\r
10102 arg "space-insert thin"
\r
10108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10112 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10113 You can also insert the following space types:
\r
10116 \begin_layout Description
\r
10118 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10122 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10125 space A line with a
\r
10126 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10130 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
\r
10134 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10137 negative thin space between the arrows.
\r
10140 \begin_layout Description
\r
10142 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10149 em) A line with an
\r
10150 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10154 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
\r
10158 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10162 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10169 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10172 \begin_layout Description
\r
10174 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10181 em) A line with a
\r
10182 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10186 \begin_inset space \quad{}
\r
10190 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10194 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10201 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10204 \begin_layout Description
\r
10206 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10213 em) A line with a
\r
10214 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10218 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
\r
10222 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10226 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10233 em) space between the arrows.
\r
10236 \begin_layout Description
\r
10238 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10241 space A line with
\r
10242 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10246 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
\r
10251 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10258 cm space between the arrows.
\r
10261 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10263 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
10269 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
\r
10273 lists the different space sizes.
\r
10276 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10277 \begin_inset Float table
\r
10282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10284 \begin_inset Caption
\r
10286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10288 LatexCommand label
\r
10289 name "tab:Width-of-the"
\r
10293 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
\r
10301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10303 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
10304 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
\r
10305 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
10306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
10309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10310 \begin_inset Text
\r
10312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10321 \begin_inset Text
\r
10323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10334 \begin_inset Text
\r
10336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10343 \begin_inset Text
\r
10345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10358 \begin_inset Text
\r
10360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10367 \begin_inset Text
\r
10369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10382 \begin_inset Text
\r
10384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10391 \begin_inset Text
\r
10393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10406 \begin_inset Text
\r
10408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10415 \begin_inset Text
\r
10417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10430 \begin_inset Text
\r
10432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10443 \begin_inset Text
\r
10445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10458 \begin_inset Text
\r
10460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10471 \begin_inset Text
\r
10473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10486 \begin_inset Text
\r
10488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
10499 \begin_inset Text
\r
10501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
10524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10530 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10542 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10543 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
\r
10544 in a uniform fashion.
\r
10545 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
\r
10546 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
\r
10547 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
\r
10548 equally between themselves.
\r
10551 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10552 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
\r
10555 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10557 This is on the left side
\r
10558 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10561 This is on the right
\r
10564 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10567 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10571 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10577 \begin_layout Quote
\r
10580 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10588 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10594 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10595 That was an example in the
\r
10601 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
\r
10605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
10609 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
\r
10612 is one in a standard paragraph.
\r
10613 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
\r
10617 sitting in-between the two arrows.
\r
10620 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10621 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
\r
10624 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10629 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
\r
10632 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10634 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
\r
10638 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10644 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10646 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
\r
10650 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10656 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10658 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
\r
10662 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10668 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10670 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
\r
10674 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10680 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10682 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
\r
10686 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10692 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10694 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
\r
10698 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10704 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
10708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10713 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
\r
10717 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
\r
10718 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
\r
10719 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
\r
10723 option in the space dialog.
\r
10731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
10733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10734 LatexCommand label
\r
10735 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
10740 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10744 Spacing ! Phantom
\r
10752 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10753 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
\r
10754 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
\r
10757 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10758 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
10761 What is correct English?:
\r
10762 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10766 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10770 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10773 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
\r
10774 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10778 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
10781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10789 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
10793 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10804 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
10810 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10812 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
\r
10813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10817 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10821 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10829 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
\r
10831 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10832 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10836 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
\r
10837 lines and insert
\r
10838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10846 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10853 into the phantom inset (note the space after
\r
10854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10862 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
\r
10863 That is why it is named
\r
10864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
10868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
10872 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
\r
10873 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
\r
10877 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
10879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
10880 LatexCommand label
\r
10881 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
\r
10886 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10890 Spacing ! Vertical
\r
10898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10899 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
\r
10901 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10902 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10904 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10910 There you find the following sizes:
\r
10913 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10926 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
\r
10931 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
\r
10933 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10934 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
10936 \begin_inset space ~
\r
10942 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10946 Document ! Settings
\r
10951 for the paragraph separation.
\r
10952 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
\r
10963 \begin_layout Standard
\r
10969 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
10972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
10978 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
\r
10979 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
\r
10984 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
\r
10985 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
\r
10994 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
\r
10995 \begin_inset Foot
\r
10998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11003 s are described in section
\r
11004 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11010 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
11019 If there are several
\r
11023 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
\r
11024 You can therefore use
\r
11028 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
\r
11031 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11036 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
\r
11037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11043 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
11050 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11051 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11061 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
\r
11062 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
\r
11074 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11075 Paragraph Alignment
\r
11076 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11080 Paragraph ! Alignment
\r
11088 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11089 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
\r
11091 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11092 Paragraph Settings
\r
11094 dialog (toolbar button
\r
11095 \begin_inset Info
\r
11097 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
11101 There are five possibilities:
\r
11104 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11110 \begin_inset Info
\r
11112 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
\r
11118 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11124 \begin_inset Info
\r
11126 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
\r
11132 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11138 \begin_inset Info
\r
11140 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
\r
11146 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11152 \begin_inset Info
\r
11154 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
\r
11160 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
11166 \begin_inset Info
\r
11168 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
\r
11174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11175 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
\r
11176 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
\r
11177 the left and right margins.
\r
11178 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
\r
11181 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11183 This paragraph is right aligned,
\r
11186 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11188 this one is centered,
\r
11191 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11193 this one is left aligned.
\r
11196 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11197 Forced Page Breaks
\r
11198 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11202 Page breaks ! Forced
\r
11208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11209 LatexCommand label
\r
11210 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
11217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11218 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
\r
11219 can force a page break where you want one.
\r
11220 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
\r
11221 Only if you use a lot of
\r
11225 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
\r
11228 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11229 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
\r
11230 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
\r
11234 have to change the page breaking.
\r
11237 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11238 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
\r
11240 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
\r
11242 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11243 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11245 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11251 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
\r
11253 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11254 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11256 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11261 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
\r
11262 the complete page.
\r
11263 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
\r
11264 on which only the last few lines are absent.
\r
11267 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11268 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
\r
11269 at the top of a page.
\r
11270 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
\r
11271 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
\r
11272 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
\r
11273 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
\r
11275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11277 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
\r
11281 to learn more about
\r
11288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
11289 Clear Page Breaks
\r
11290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11291 LatexCommand label
\r
11292 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
11297 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11301 Page breaks ! Clear
\r
11309 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11310 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
\r
11311 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
\r
11312 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
\r
11313 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
\r
11314 it, if necessary by adding pages.
\r
11317 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11318 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
\r
11320 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11321 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11323 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11329 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
\r
11331 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11332 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11334 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11338 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11343 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
\r
11344 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
\r
11347 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11348 Forced Line Breaks
\r
11349 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11360 LatexCommand label
\r
11361 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
11368 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11369 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
\r
11371 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
\r
11373 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11374 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11376 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11380 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11386 \begin_inset Info
\r
11388 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
11392 Another type that is inserted via the menu
\r
11394 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11395 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11397 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11401 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11407 \begin_inset Info
\r
11409 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
\r
11412 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
\r
11413 the page margins.
\r
11414 This is useful to avoid
\r
11415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
11419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
11422 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
\r
11425 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11426 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
\r
11427 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
\r
11428 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
\r
11429 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
\r
11430 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11436 reference "sec:Quote"
\r
11441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11443 reference "sec:Verse"
\r
11448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11450 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
\r
11457 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11460 LatexCommand label
\r
11461 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
\r
11466 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11478 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11480 \begin_inset CommandInset line
\r
11481 LatexCommand rule
\r
11491 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11495 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11496 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11498 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11503 you can insert horizontal lines.
\r
11504 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
\r
11505 of the current text line or the paragraph.
\r
11506 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
\r
11509 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11511 \begin_inset CommandInset line
\r
11512 LatexCommand rule
\r
11522 \begin_layout Section
\r
11523 Characters and Symbols
\r
11526 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11527 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
\r
11528 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
\r
11529 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
\r
11531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11537 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
\r
11541 for information on how this is done.
\r
11544 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11545 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
\r
11550 dialog via the menu
\r
11552 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11553 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11559 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11568 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
\r
11569 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
\r
11570 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
\r
11578 \begin_layout Section
\r
11579 Fonts and Text Styles
\r
11580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11581 LatexCommand label
\r
11582 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
\r
11589 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11591 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11603 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11604 There are two types of fonts:
\r
11607 \begin_layout Description
\r
11609 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11613 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11622 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
\r
11623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11627 characters) in the font.
\r
11628 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
\r
11629 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
\r
11630 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
\r
11631 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
\r
11632 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
\r
11633 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
\r
11634 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
\r
11635 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11638 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
\r
11639 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
\r
11640 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
\r
11641 sizes than at small ones.
\r
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11646 \family typewriter
\r
11650 \family typewriter
\r
11654 \family typewriter
\r
11656 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11661 are vector fonts.
\r
11664 \begin_layout Description
\r
11666 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11670 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11679 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
\r
11680 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
\r
11681 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
\r
11682 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
\r
11683 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
\r
11684 image manipulation program.
\r
11685 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
\r
11686 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
\r
11687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11690 pixels high up to 34
\r
11691 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11694 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
\r
11695 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
\r
11696 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
\r
11698 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
\r
11699 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
\r
11700 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
11703 Bitmap fonts are named
\r
11704 \family typewriter
\r
11706 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11711 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
\r
11714 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11715 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
\r
11716 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
\r
11717 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
\r
11718 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
\r
11719 use scalable fonts.
\r
11722 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11723 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
\r
11726 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11727 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
\r
11728 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
\r
11729 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
\r
11730 font to emphasize text, you use an
\r
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
11739 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
\r
11740 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
\r
11744 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11745 LaTeX font support
\r
11746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11747 LatexCommand label
\r
11748 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
11755 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11756 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
\r
11757 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
\r
11758 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
\r
11760 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
\r
11761 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
\r
11762 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
\r
11763 to a word processor.
\r
11764 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
\r
11765 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
\r
11766 across different machines.
\r
11767 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
\r
11768 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
\r
11770 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
\r
11772 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11778 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
11783 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
\r
11784 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
\r
11788 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11789 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
\r
11790 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
\r
11792 Both engines are supported by LyX.
\r
11793 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
\r
11794 that is installed on your system.
\r
11795 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
\r
11798 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11799 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11807 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
\r
11808 es; so you might have to experiment.
\r
11816 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11817 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
11820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11825 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
\r
11826 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
\r
11834 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
11835 Document Font and Font size
\r
11836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
11837 LatexCommand label
\r
11838 name "sub:Document-Font"
\r
11843 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11853 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11865 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11866 You can set the document fonts in the
\r
11868 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
11872 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
11875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11876 Document ! Settings
\r
11886 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
\r
11887 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
\r
11890 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11896 \family typewriter
\r
11899 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
\r
11900 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
\r
11901 with the roman font.
\r
11904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
11911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11920 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
\r
11921 This requires that you use
\r
11927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
11966 as the output format, i.
\r
11967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
11971 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
11974 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
\r
11975 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
11981 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
11986 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
\r
11987 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
\r
11989 \begin_inset space ~
\r
11992 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
\r
11993 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
\r
11994 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
11995 or font failures.
\r
11996 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
\r
11999 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12000 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
\r
12005 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
\r
12010 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
\r
12011 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
\r
12012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12016 \family typewriter
\r
12018 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12028 \family typewriter
\r
12032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12036 \family typewriter
\r
12037 European Computer Modern
\r
12040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12044 \family typewriter
\r
12047 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
\r
12050 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12052 \family typewriter
\r
12056 \family typewriter
\r
12059 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
\r
12060 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
\r
12061 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12065 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
\r
12066 \family typewriter
\r
12068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12073 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
\r
12079 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
\r
12080 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
\r
12083 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12087 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12092 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
\r
12094 \family typewriter
\r
12098 \family typewriter
\r
12105 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12110 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
\r
12111 \family typewriter
\r
12114 as the default font.
\r
12115 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
\r
12116 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
\r
12119 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12124 looks identical to
\r
12125 \family typewriter
\r
12129 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12133 One difference is improved kerning.
\r
12141 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12145 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12149 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12154 fonts in (the rare) case that
\r
12157 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12162 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
\r
12164 \family typewriter
\r
12168 \family typewriter
\r
12173 \family typewriter
\r
12176 is a virtual font.
\r
12177 Virtual means that it
\r
12178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12186 \family typewriter
\r
12189 -glyphs from other fonts.
\r
12190 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
\r
12192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12208 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12212 Loading the LaTeX-package
\r
12217 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12221 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
\r
12226 with the document preamble line
\r
12227 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12234 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
\r
12235 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12240 will fix the guillemet problem.
\r
12245 and that accented characters are not
\r
12249 glyph, but built of
\r
12253 characters, the accent and the letter.
\r
12254 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
\r
12256 \family typewriter
\r
12260 If you search for example for the French word
\r
12261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12268 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
\r
12270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12277 and not for the glyph
\r
12278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12282 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12292 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12293 If you do not like the look of
\r
12294 \family typewriter
\r
12298 \family typewriter
\r
12301 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
\r
12302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12306 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12310 \family typewriter
\r
12312 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12318 \family typewriter
\r
12322 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
\r
12323 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12326 serif and typewriter fonts,
\r
12327 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12331 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
\r
12332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12338 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12347 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
\r
12348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12352 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
12360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12364 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
12370 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12378 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12388 but you can also select your own.
\r
12389 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12392 The differences between roman,
\r
12395 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12401 \family typewriter
\r
12404 fonts are explained in section
\r
12405 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12411 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12416 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12422 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12427 was originally designed for newspapers.
\r
12428 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
\r
12429 into the small newspaper columns.
\r
12433 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12438 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
\r
12441 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12442 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
\r
12455 Some classes provide additional sizes.
\r
12460 depends on the class you are using.
\r
12461 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
\r
12464 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12465 Note that the font size is the
\r
12470 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
\r
12471 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
\r
12472 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
\r
12475 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12480 dialog if needed.
\r
12481 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
\r
12482 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12488 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12495 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12499 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12504 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
\r
12506 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12509 serif or typewriter.
\r
12514 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
\r
12524 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
\r
12527 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12529 \family typewriter
\r
12536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12545 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
\r
12546 the LaTeX-package
\r
12551 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12555 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
\r
12561 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12567 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
12572 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
\r
12573 Unless you have specific reasons, use
\r
12580 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12581 With some fonts, the checkboxes
\r
12583 Use Old Style Figures
\r
12587 Use True Small Caps
\r
12590 These are extra features some fonts provide.
\r
12593 Use Old Style Figures
\r
12595 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
\r
12597 Old style figures are the numerals (0
\r
12598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
12605 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
\r
12609 Use True Small Caps
\r
12611 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
\r
12612 of scaled capitals.
\r
12613 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
\r
12614 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
\r
12617 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12622 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
\r
12623 a font to display the script characters.
\r
12624 \begin_inset Foot
\r
12627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12628 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
\r
12633 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12637 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
12642 So this has no effect for the document language
\r
12646 that does not use
\r
12656 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
12660 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
12663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12668 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
\r
12672 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
\r
12673 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
\r
12674 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
\r
12676 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12679 dialog, see section
\r
12680 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
12686 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
12698 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
12699 Using Different Character Styles
\r
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12722 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12723 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
\r
12724 certain paragraph environments.
\r
12725 LyX supports two character styles,
\r
12734 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
\r
12738 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12743 style, do one of the following:
\r
12746 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12747 click on the toolbar button
\r
12748 \begin_inset Info
\r
12756 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12757 use the key binding
\r
12758 \begin_inset Info
\r
12766 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12767 These commands are all toggles.
\r
12772 style is already active, they deactivate it.
\r
12775 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12776 One typically uses the
\r
12780 style for proper names.
\r
12782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12789 is the original author of LyX.
\r
12790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
12796 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12797 A more widely used character style is the
\r
12802 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
\r
12809 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12810 clicking on the toolbar button
\r
12811 \begin_inset Info
\r
12819 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
12820 using the keybindings
\r
12821 \begin_inset Info
\r
12829 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12834 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
\r
12835 es use a different font.
\r
12838 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12839 We've been using the
\r
12843 style all over the place in this document.
\r
12844 Here's one more example:
\r
12847 \begin_layout Quotation
\r
12850 Do not overuse character styles!
\r
12853 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12854 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
\r
12855 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
\r
12856 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
\r
12857 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
\r
12861 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12862 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
\r
12863 \begin_inset Info
\r
12865 arg "font-default"
\r
12870 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12872 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12875 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12879 \begin_inset Info
\r
12881 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
12887 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
12888 Fine-Tuning with the
\r
12893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
12894 LatexCommand label
\r
12895 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
12900 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
12912 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12913 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
\r
12914 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
\r
12915 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
\r
12916 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
\r
12917 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
\r
12918 from ordinary dialog.
\r
12921 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12922 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
\r
12923 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
\r
12924 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
12927 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
\r
12928 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
\r
12931 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12932 To use custom character styles, open the
\r
12934 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12936 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12939 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
12942 dialog or press the toolbar button
\r
12943 \begin_inset Info
\r
12945 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
12949 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
\r
12950 font property that you can choose.
\r
12951 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
\r
12954 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12959 , which keeps the current state of that property.
\r
12964 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
\r
12965 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
\r
12966 environments all at once.
\r
12969 \begin_layout Standard
\r
12970 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
\r
12973 \begin_inset space ~
\r
12985 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
12986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
12992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
12996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13000 The possible options are:
\r
13004 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13010 This is the Roman font family.
\r
13011 Normally a serif font.
\r
13012 It's also the default family.
\r
13014 \begin_inset Info
\r
13022 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13027 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13034 This is the Sans Serif font family.
\r
13038 \begin_inset Info
\r
13046 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13053 \family typewriter
\r
13054 This is the Typewriter font family.
\r
13058 \begin_inset Info
\r
13060 arg "font-typewriter"
\r
13069 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13075 This corresponds to the print weight.
\r
13080 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13086 This is the Medium font series.
\r
13087 It's also the default series.
\r
13090 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13098 This is the Bold font series.
\r
13102 \begin_inset Info
\r
13111 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13117 As the name implies.
\r
13122 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13128 This is the Upright font shape.
\r
13129 It's also the default shape.
\r
13132 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13147 s the Italic font shape
\r
13153 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13161 This is the Slanted font shape
\r
13163 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
\r
13166 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13171 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13178 This is the Small caps font shape
\r
13185 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13191 Alters the text color.
\r
13192 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
\r
13196 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13201 , which means that the document default color set in
\r
13203 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13204 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13210 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13215 is used, you can choose between
\r
13248 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
13251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13260 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13266 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
\r
13267 the language of the document.
\r
13268 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
\r
13269 (only within LyX).
\r
13270 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13273 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
\r
13274 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
\r
13275 When using the spell checking (see section
\r
13276 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
13282 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
13286 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
\r
13289 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13295 Alters the size of the font.
\r
13296 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
\r
13297 proportional to the document font size.
\r
13298 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
\r
13299 what you want to do.
\r
13304 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13324 \begin_inset Info
\r
13326 arg "font-size tiny"
\r
13332 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13352 \begin_inset Info
\r
13354 arg "font-size scriptsize"
\r
13360 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13367 \size footnotesize
\r
13369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13380 \begin_inset Info
\r
13382 arg "font-size footnotesize"
\r
13388 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13408 \begin_inset Info
\r
13410 arg "font-size small"
\r
13416 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13431 It's also the default size.
\r
13433 \begin_inset Info
\r
13435 arg "font-size normal"
\r
13441 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13461 \begin_inset Info
\r
13463 arg "font-size large"
\r
13469 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13489 \begin_inset Info
\r
13491 arg "font-size larger"
\r
13497 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13517 \begin_inset Info
\r
13519 arg "font-size largest"
\r
13525 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13545 \begin_inset Info
\r
13547 arg "font-size huge"
\r
13553 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13573 \begin_inset Info
\r
13575 arg "font-size giant"
\r
13581 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13587 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
\r
13588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13605 \begin_inset Info
\r
13607 arg "font-size increase"
\r
13613 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13619 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
\r
13620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13637 \begin_inset Info
\r
13639 arg "font-size decrease"
\r
13646 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13651 : don't go crazy with this feature.
\r
13652 You should almost never need to change the font size.
\r
13653 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
\r
13654 — use those instead.
\r
13655 This is here for fine-tuning only!
\r
13658 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13664 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
\r
13669 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13677 This is text with emphasize on
\r
13680 This might seem like the same as
\r
13684 , but it is actually a bit different.
\r
13690 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
\r
13692 Normally this font is equal to italic.
\r
13695 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13703 This is text with Underbar on.
\r
13707 \begin_inset Info
\r
13709 arg "font-underline"
\r
13715 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13720 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
\r
13721 when you could not change fonts.
\r
13722 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
\r
13723 This is only possible in LyX because some people
\r
13727 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
\r
13730 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13735 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13742 This is text with Double underbar on.
\r
13746 \begin_inset Info
\r
13748 arg "font-underunderline"
\r
13752 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13755 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
\r
13756 about double underbar.
\r
13759 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13764 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13771 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
\r
13775 \begin_inset Info
\r
13777 arg "font-underwave"
\r
13781 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13784 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
\r
13785 Keep antinausea pills handy.
\r
13788 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13789 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13796 This is text with Strikeout on.
\r
13798 \strikeout default
\r
13800 \begin_inset Info
\r
13802 arg "font-strikeout"
\r
13806 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13809 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
\r
13810 changed in the meantime.
\r
13813 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
13814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
13821 This is text with Noun on.
\r
13828 , this is a logical attribute.
\r
13829 Normally it's equivalent to
\r
13832 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13841 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13842 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
\r
13843 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
\r
13845 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13847 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13850 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
13854 \begin_inset Info
\r
13856 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
13859 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
\r
13860 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
\r
13861 \begin_inset Info
\r
13863 arg "textstyle-apply"
\r
13867 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
\r
13871 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13872 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
\r
13873 \begin_inset Info
\r
13875 arg "font-default"
\r
13879 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
\r
13880 (suppose you just set the shape to
\r
13881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13888 and the series to
\r
13889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13899 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13904 switch and press
\r
13911 \begin_layout Standard
\r
13912 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
\r
13920 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13932 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
13938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13945 font, which means every character has the same width; the
\r
13946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13953 is as wide as the
\r
13954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
13958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
13962 Here is an example
\r
13963 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
13967 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
\r
13970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13977 \family typewriter
\r
13981 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
13984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
13985 For more on phantoms see section
\r
13986 \begin_inset space ~
\r
13990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
13992 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
14002 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14005 no typewriter text
\r
14008 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
14013 fonts use characters with serifs.
\r
14014 These are the small
\r
14015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14022 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
\r
14023 The following example shows the difference:
\r
14024 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14028 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14033 text without serifs
\r
14036 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
14039 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
\r
14040 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
\r
14047 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
14052 is not recommended for use as a base type.
\r
14053 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
\r
14054 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
\r
14057 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14065 refers to applying or removing font properties.
\r
14066 When a property is marked for toggling in the
\r
14069 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14074 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
\r
14075 the property to be removed.
\r
14076 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
\r
14077 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
\r
14078 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
\r
14081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14096 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
\r
14097 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
\r
14098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14105 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
\r
14109 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14114 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
\r
14117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14124 is never toggled.
\r
14125 If you, for example, set
\r
14126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14144 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14149 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
\r
14151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14158 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
\r
14161 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14162 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
\r
14163 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
\r
14166 \begin_layout Section
\r
14167 Printing and Previewing
\r
14170 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
14174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14175 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
\r
14176 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
\r
14177 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
\r
14178 goes on behind-the-scenes.
\r
14179 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
\r
14181 Additional Features
\r
14186 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14187 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
\r
14188 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
\r
14189 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
\r
14190 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
\r
14191 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
\r
14192 This happens in two stages:
\r
14195 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
14196 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
\r
14197 generating a file with the extension,
\r
14198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14202 \family typewriter
\r
14206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14212 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
14213 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
\r
14214 \family typewriter
\r
14217 file to produce printable output.
\r
14220 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
14221 Output file formats
\r
14222 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
14233 LatexCommand label
\r
14234 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
14241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14242 Simple text (ASCII)
\r
14243 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14247 File formats ! ASCII
\r
14255 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14256 This file type has the extension
\r
14257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14261 \family typewriter
\r
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14269 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
\r
14270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14273 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
\r
14274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14280 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14281 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
\r
14283 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14284 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14286 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14292 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
\r
14293 a BibTeX bibliography (section
\r
14294 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14300 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
14305 If your document includes such material, use
\r
14307 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14308 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14310 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14314 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14318 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14330 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14336 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
\r
14337 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
\r
14340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14342 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14346 File formats ! LaTeX
\r
14354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14355 This file type has the extension
\r
14356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14360 \family typewriter
\r
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14367 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
\r
14369 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
\r
14370 it manually with console commands.
\r
14371 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
\r
14372 you view or export your document.
\r
14375 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14376 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
\r
14378 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14379 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14394 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
\r
14395 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14401 reference "sub:Export"
\r
14408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14410 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14414 File formats ! DVI
\r
14422 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14423 This file type has the extension
\r
14424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14428 \family typewriter
\r
14432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14440 device-independent
\r
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14444 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
\r
14445 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
\r
14446 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
\r
14450 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14451 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
\r
14452 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
\r
14453 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
\r
14454 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
\r
14455 when you view the DVI.
\r
14456 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
\r
14459 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14460 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
\r
14462 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14463 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14468 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14469 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14471 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14488 The latter option uses the program
\r
14489 \family typewriter
\r
14494 \family typewriter
\r
14497 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
\r
14498 font access (see section
\r
14499 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14505 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14510 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
\r
14511 standard TeX processor.
\r
14514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14516 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14520 File formats ! PostScript
\r
14528 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14529 This file type has the extension
\r
14530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14534 \family typewriter
\r
14538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14542 PostScript was developed by the company
\r
14543 \family typewriter
\r
14546 as a printer language.
\r
14547 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
\r
14549 PostScript can be seen as a
\r
14550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14553 programming language
\r
14554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14557 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
\r
14558 \begin_inset Foot
\r
14561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14562 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
\r
14568 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14572 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
\r
14582 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
\r
14585 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14586 PostScript can only contain images in the format
\r
14587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14590 Encapsulated PostScript
\r
14591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14594 (EPS, file extension
\r
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14599 \family typewriter
\r
14603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14607 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
\r
14608 to convert them in the background to EPS.
\r
14609 If, for example, you have 50
\r
14610 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14613 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
\r
14614 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14617 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
\r
14618 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
\r
14619 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
\r
14620 EPS to avoid this problem.
\r
14623 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14624 You can export to PostScript using the menu
\r
14626 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14627 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14635 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14639 File formats ! PDF
\r
14645 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14657 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14658 This file type has the extension
\r
14659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14663 \family typewriter
\r
14667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14675 Portable Document Format
\r
14676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14679 (PDF) developed by
\r
14680 \family typewriter
\r
14683 was derived from PostScript.
\r
14684 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
\r
14686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14693 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
\r
14694 looks exactly the same.
\r
14697 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14698 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
\r
14699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14702 Joint Photographic Experts Group
\r
14703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14706 (JPG, file extension
\r
14707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14711 \family typewriter
\r
14715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14723 \family typewriter
\r
14727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14734 Portable Network Graphics
\r
14735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14738 (PNG, file extension
\r
14739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14743 \family typewriter
\r
14747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14751 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
\r
14752 background to one of these formats.
\r
14753 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
\r
14754 will slow down your workflow.
\r
14755 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
\r
14758 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14759 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
\r
14761 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
14764 in different ways:
\r
14767 \begin_layout Description
\r
14769 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14772 (pdflatex) This uses the program
\r
14773 \family typewriter
\r
14776 which converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14779 \begin_layout Description
\r
14781 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14795 X) This uses the program
\r
14796 \family typewriter
\r
14799 which converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14801 \family typewriter
\r
14804 is a new engine, derived from
\r
14805 \family typewriter
\r
14808 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
\r
14809 access (see section
\r
14810 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14816 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14821 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
\r
14822 standard TeX processor.
\r
14825 \begin_layout Description
\r
14827 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14841 X) This uses the program
\r
14842 \family typewriter
\r
14845 that converts your file directly to PDF.
\r
14847 \family typewriter
\r
14850 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
\r
14851 font access (see section
\r
14852 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
14858 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
\r
14863 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
\r
14864 vertically written Japanese.
\r
14867 \begin_layout Description
\r
14869 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14872 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
\r
14873 \family typewriter
\r
14876 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
\r
14880 \begin_layout Description
\r
14882 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14885 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
\r
14886 \family typewriter
\r
14889 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
\r
14890 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
\r
14891 \family typewriter
\r
14894 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
\r
14895 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
\r
14898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14899 We recommend using
\r
14902 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14908 \family typewriter
\r
14911 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
\r
14912 works without problems.
\r
14913 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
14914 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
\r
14918 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14937 \begin_inset space ~
\r
14944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14953 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
\r
14955 \family typewriter
\r
14961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
14963 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14967 FileFormats ! XHTML
\r
14973 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
14976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
14985 \begin_layout Standard
\r
14986 This file type has the extension
\r
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
14991 \family typewriter
\r
14995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
14999 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
\r
15000 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
\r
15001 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
\r
15002 suitable for the purpose.
\r
15003 For the math output you can choose in the menu
\r
15005 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15006 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15009 between different formats, which are described in section
\r
15011 Math Output in XHTML
\r
15016 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15024 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15025 XHTML output remains
\r
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15029 under development
\r
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15033 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
\r
15036 LyX and the World Wide Web
\r
15040 Additional Features
\r
15042 manual, for more information.
\r
15045 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15046 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
\r
15048 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15049 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15055 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15057 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15061 Document ! Preview
\r
15069 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15070 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
\r
15071 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
\r
15086 or use the toolbar button
\r
15087 \begin_inset Info
\r
15089 arg "buffer-view"
\r
15093 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
\r
15094 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
\r
15095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15101 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
15105 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
\r
15107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15113 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
15118 Further output formats can be selected via
\r
15120 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15121 View (Other Formats)
\r
15123 or the toolbar button
\r
15124 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
15125 filename ../images/view-others.png
\r
15127 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
15134 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15135 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
\r
15136 viewer window using the menu
\r
15138 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15143 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15144 Update (Other Formats)
\r
15149 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15150 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
\r
15152 To have a real output, export your document.
\r
15155 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15156 Printing the File from within LyX
\r
15157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15158 LatexCommand label
\r
15159 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
\r
15166 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15167 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
\r
15168 it directly from within LyX.
\r
15169 To print a file, select the menu
\r
15171 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15175 \begin_inset Info
\r
15177 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
15180 ) or click on the toolbar button
\r
15181 \begin_inset Info
\r
15183 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
15187 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
\r
15188 This file is then processed by the program
\r
15189 \family typewriter
\r
15192 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
\r
15193 \family typewriter
\r
15197 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
\r
15200 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15201 You can set the following print parameters in the
\r
15204 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15212 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
15213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
15218 This is the name of the printer to print to.
\r
15219 \begin_inset Foot
\r
15222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15223 Note that this printer name is for the program
\r
15224 \family typewriter
\r
15229 \family typewriter
\r
15232 has to be configured for this printer name.
\r
15233 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
\r
15234 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15240 reference "sub:Printer"
\r
15249 The printer should understand PostScript.
\r
15252 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
15253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
15258 The name of a file to print to.
\r
15259 The output will be a PostScript file.
\r
15260 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
\r
15264 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15265 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
\r
15266 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
\r
15267 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
\r
15268 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
\r
15269 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
\r
15270 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
\r
15271 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
\r
15274 \begin_layout Section
\r
15275 A few Words about Typography
\r
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15288 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15289 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
\r
15290 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15300 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15312 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15318 \family typewriter
\r
15322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15325 character comes in four lengths: the
\r
15337 , and the minus sign:
\r
15338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
15344 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15345 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
15346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
\r
15347 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
15348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
15349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
15350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
15351 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15353 \begin_inset Text
\r
15355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15362 \begin_inset Text
\r
15364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
15371 \begin_inset Text
\r
15373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15380 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15382 \begin_inset Text
\r
15384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15391 \begin_inset Text
\r
15393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15400 \begin_inset Text
\r
15402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15407 \family typewriter
\r
15411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15420 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15422 \begin_inset Text
\r
15424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15431 \begin_inset Text
\r
15433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15440 \begin_inset Text
\r
15442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15445 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15447 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15450 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15457 <row interlinespace="3mm">
\r
15458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15459 \begin_inset Text
\r
15461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15468 \begin_inset Text
\r
15470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15477 \begin_inset Text
\r
15479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15482 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15484 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15487 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15496 \begin_inset Text
\r
15498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15505 \begin_inset Text
\r
15507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15508 \begin_inset Formula $-$
\r
15516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
15517 \begin_inset Text
\r
15519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15524 \family typewriter
\r
15528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15542 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
15548 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15549 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
\r
15550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15554 \family typewriter
\r
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15561 character multiple times in a row.
\r
15562 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
\r
15563 the final output, but not in LyX.
\r
15565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15576 gives a en dash,
\r
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15595 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15596 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
\r
15597 math mode and has a length of its own.
\r
15598 Here are some examples:
\r
15601 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15602 line- and page-breaks
\r
15603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15613 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15625 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15626 Oh — there's a dash.
\r
15627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15637 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15638 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
\r
15642 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
15652 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15654 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15665 LatexCommand label
\r
15666 name "sub:Hyphenation"
\r
15673 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15674 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
\r
15675 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
\r
15680 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15684 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
15689 following the rules of the document language.
\r
15692 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15693 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
\r
15698 font and with unusual constructs, like
\r
15699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15707 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
\r
15709 This is done with the menu
\r
15711 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15712 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15714 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15720 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
\r
15721 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
\r
15724 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15725 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
\r
15726 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
\r
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15736 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
\r
15737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15744 as a hyphenation possibility.
\r
15745 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
\r
15746 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
\r
15747 as described in section
\r
15748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15751 Prevent Hyphenation
\r
15752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15758 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15766 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
15767 Punctuation Marks
\r
15768 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15772 Punctuation marks
\r
15780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
15781 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
\r
15782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
15783 LatexCommand label
\r
15784 name "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
15791 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15792 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
\r
15793 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
\r
15794 LaTeX then adds the
\r
15795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15798 appropriate amount of space.
\r
15799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15802 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
\r
15804 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
\r
15805 gets after another word.
\r
15808 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15809 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
\r
15810 not work in all cases.
\r
15812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
15816 \family typewriter
\r
15820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
15823 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
\r
15824 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
\r
15827 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15828 Here are some examples of
\r
15832 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
\r
15835 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15840 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15845 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15846 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
\r
15849 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15855 this is too much space!
\r
15858 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15863 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15864 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
\r
15867 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15868 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
\r
15871 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15875 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15880 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
\r
15881 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15887 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
15892 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15896 Spaces ! inter-word
\r
15904 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15908 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15913 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
\r
15914 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
15920 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
15925 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
15937 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
15941 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15945 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15949 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15956 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
15958 \begin_inset space ~
\r
15963 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
\r
15964 This function is also bound to
\r
15965 \begin_inset Info
\r
15967 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
\r
15973 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15974 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
\r
15977 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
15983 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
15986 this is too much space!
\r
15989 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
15990 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
\r
15994 \begin_layout Standard
\r
15995 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
\r
15996 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
\r
15997 will take care of this.
\r
16000 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16001 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
\r
16005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16010 feature described in the section
\r
16016 Additional Features
\r
16021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
16023 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16027 Typography ! Quotes
\r
16033 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16067 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16068 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
\r
16069 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
\r
16070 and use a closing quote at the end.
\r
16072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16080 The keyboard character,
\r
16084 , generates this automatically.
\r
16087 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16088 You can specify what character the
\r
16092 key produces using the submenu
\r
16098 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16102 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16106 Document ! Settings
\r
16111 dialog in the box
\r
16116 There are six choices:
\r
16119 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16143 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16147 \begin_inset Quotes sld
\r
16151 \begin_inset Quotes srd
\r
16157 \begin_inset Quotes sld
\r
16161 \begin_inset Quotes srd
\r
16167 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16171 \begin_inset Quotes gld
\r
16175 \begin_inset Quotes grd
\r
16181 \begin_inset Quotes gld
\r
16185 \begin_inset Quotes grd
\r
16191 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16192 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16195 \begin_inset Quotes pld
\r
16199 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
16205 \begin_inset Quotes pld
\r
16209 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
16215 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16219 \begin_inset Quotes fld
\r
16223 \begin_inset Quotes frd
\r
16229 \begin_inset Quotes fld
\r
16233 \begin_inset Quotes frd
\r
16239 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
16240 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
16243 \begin_inset Quotes ald
\r
16247 \begin_inset Quotes ard
\r
16253 \begin_inset Quotes ald
\r
16257 \begin_inset Quotes ard
\r
16263 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16264 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
\r
16265 \begin_inset Info
\r
16267 arg "quote-insert single"
\r
16273 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16275 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16279 Typography ! Ligatures
\r
16285 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16318 LatexCommand label
\r
16319 name "sub:Ligatures"
\r
16326 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16327 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
\r
16328 print them as single characters.
\r
16329 These groups are known as
\r
16334 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
\r
16336 Here are the standard ligatures:
\r
16339 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16343 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16347 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16351 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16355 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
16359 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16360 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
\r
16363 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16364 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
\r
16365 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
\r
16366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16373 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
\r
16374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16389 To break a ligature, use
\r
16391 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16392 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16394 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16412 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
\r
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16429 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
\r
16431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16437 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16438 LyX's Proper Names
\r
16439 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16443 LyX ! Proper names
\r
16449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16450 LatexCommand label
\r
16451 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
\r
16458 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16459 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
\r
16460 characters in different sizes and heights.
\r
16461 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
\r
16462 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
\r
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16482 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
16485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16486 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
\r
16487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16494 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
\r
16495 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
\r
16500 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
\r
16501 following proper names:
\r
16504 \begin_layout Description
\r
16505 LyX The name of the game, write
\r
16506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16527 \begin_layout Description
\r
16528 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
\r
16529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16550 \begin_layout Description
\r
16551 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
\r
16552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16573 \begin_layout Description
\r
16574 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
\r
16575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16596 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16597 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
\r
16598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16602 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
\r
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16610 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
\r
16611 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
\r
16612 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
\r
16615 : The actual version is
\r
16616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16623 , the previous one was
\r
16624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16634 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16635 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
\r
16636 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
\r
16637 In LyX this will look like
\r
16638 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
16639 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
\r
16645 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16648 For more about TeX Code, see section
\r
16649 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
16655 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
16662 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16664 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16668 Typography ! Units
\r
16676 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16677 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
\r
16678 space between two words.
\r
16679 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
\r
16682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
16686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
16689 for units use the menu
\r
16691 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16692 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16694 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16700 \begin_inset Info
\r
16702 arg "space-insert thin"
\r
16708 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16709 Here is an example to show the differences:
\r
16712 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16713 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
16714 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
\r
16715 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
16716 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
16717 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
16719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16720 \begin_inset Text
\r
16722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16724 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16728 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
\r
16736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16737 \begin_inset Text
\r
16739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16740 space between number and unit
\r
16747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16748 \begin_inset Text
\r
16750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
16756 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
\r
16764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
16765 \begin_inset Text
\r
16767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16768 half space between number and unit
\r
16781 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
16782 Widows and Orphans
\r
16783 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16787 Typography ! Widows and orphans
\r
16795 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16796 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
\r
16798 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
\r
16799 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
\r
16800 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
\r
16801 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
\r
16802 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
\r
16803 These bits of text became known as
\r
16814 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16815 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
\r
16816 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
\r
16817 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
\r
16818 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
\r
16819 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
\r
16820 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
\r
16821 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
\r
16824 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16825 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
\r
16826 tweak that behavior.
\r
16827 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
\r
16828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
16833 LatexCommand cite
\r
16834 key "latexcompanion"
\r
16839 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16843 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
16844 LatexCommand cite
\r
16849 ) may have more information.
\r
16850 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
\r
16853 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
16854 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
\r
16855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16856 LatexCommand label
\r
16857 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
\r
16864 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16865 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
\r
16868 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16874 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
\r
16877 \begin_layout Section
\r
16879 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
16882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
16890 LatexCommand label
\r
16898 \begin_layout Standard
\r
16899 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
\r
16902 \begin_layout Description
\r
16904 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16907 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
\r
16908 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16912 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
16915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16916 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
\r
16924 \begin_layout Description
\r
16925 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
\r
16926 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
\r
16928 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16929 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16942 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16948 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16952 \begin_inset Note Comment
\r
16955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16956 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
\r
16964 \begin_layout Description
\r
16966 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16969 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
\r
16970 set in the document settings under
\r
16972 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
16974 \begin_inset space ~
\r
16980 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16984 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
16988 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
16991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16993 \begin_inset Foot
\r
16996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
16997 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
\r
16998 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
\r
17003 of a comment that appears in the output.
\r
17009 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17013 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17016 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
\r
17019 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17020 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
\r
17021 \begin_inset Info
\r
17023 arg "note-insert"
\r
17028 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17032 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
\r
17035 \begin_layout Section
\r
17037 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17048 LatexCommand label
\r
17049 name "sec:Footnotes"
\r
17056 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17057 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
\r
17060 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17063 or the toolbar button
\r
17064 \begin_inset Info
\r
17066 arg "footnote-insert"
\r
17077 a box like this:
\r
17078 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
17079 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
\r
17088 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
\r
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17117 label, the box will
\r
17121 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
\r
17122 Clicking on the box label again will close
\r
17135 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
\r
17136 and click on the footnote
\r
17151 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17152 Here is an example footnote:
\r
17157 \begin_inset Foot
\r
17160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17161 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
\r
17169 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17170 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
\r
17171 position where the footnote box is placed.
\r
17172 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
\r
17173 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
\r
17174 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
\r
17175 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
\r
17180 ey are described in the
\r
17183 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17191 \begin_layout Section
\r
17193 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17204 LatexCommand label
\r
17205 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
\r
17212 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17213 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
\r
17214 When you insert a margin note via the menu
\r
17216 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17218 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17223 or the toolbar button
\r
17224 \begin_inset Info
\r
17226 arg "marginalnote-insert"
\r
17245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17252 appearing within your text.
\r
17253 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
\r
17262 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17263 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
\r
17267 \begin_inset Marginal
\r
17270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17272 This is a marginal note.
\r
17280 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17281 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
\r
17282 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
\r
17283 pages, right on odd pages.
\r
17286 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17287 For further information about marginal notes see the section
\r
17290 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17298 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17306 \begin_layout Section
\r
17307 Graphics and Images
\r
17308 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17318 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17329 LatexCommand label
\r
17330 name "sec:Graphics"
\r
17337 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17338 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
\r
17339 you want and click on the toolbar icon
\r
17340 \begin_inset Info
\r
17342 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
17347 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
17351 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
\r
17354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17355 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
\r
17363 tab allows you to choose your image file.
\r
17364 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
\r
17366 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
\r
17367 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17373 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
17380 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17385 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
\r
17386 of the image in the output.
\r
17387 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
\r
17391 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17395 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17404 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17408 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17412 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17417 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
\r
17418 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
\r
17426 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17441 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17445 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17461 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
\r
17462 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
\r
17466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17471 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
\r
17472 with the image size is printed.
\r
17476 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17480 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17484 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17489 is explained in the
\r
17492 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17497 manual in section
\r
17504 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17505 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
\r
17506 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
\r
17508 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
\r
17511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17513 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
17514 filename clipart/mobius.eps
\r
17522 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17523 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
\r
17524 the image into a float, see section
\r
17525 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17531 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
\r
17538 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
17540 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
17551 LatexCommand label
\r
17552 name "sub:Image-Formats"
\r
17559 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17560 You can insert images in any known file format.
\r
17561 But as we explained in section
\r
17562 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17568 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
17572 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
\r
17573 LyX therefore uses the program
\r
17574 \family typewriter
\r
17577 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
\r
17578 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
\r
17579 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
\r
17580 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
17586 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
17593 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17594 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
\r
17597 \begin_layout Description
\r
17599 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17602 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
\r
17603 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
\r
17604 Well-known bitmap image formats are
\r
17605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17608 Graphics Interchange Format
\r
17609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17612 (GIF, file extension
\r
17613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17617 \family typewriter
\r
17621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17625 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17660 Portable Network Graphics
\r
17661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17664 (PNG, file extension
\r
17665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17669 \family typewriter
\r
17673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17677 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17712 Joint Photographic Experts Group
\r
17713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17716 (JPG, file extension
\r
17717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17721 \family typewriter
\r
17725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17733 \family typewriter
\r
17737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17741 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17775 \begin_layout Description
\r
17777 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17780 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
\r
17782 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
\r
17783 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
\r
17784 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
\r
17785 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
17788 Scalable image formats can be
\r
17789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17792 Scalable Vector Graphics
\r
17793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17796 (SVG, file extension
\r
17797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17801 \family typewriter
\r
17805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17809 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17844 Encapsulated PostScript
\r
17845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17848 (EPS, file extension
\r
17849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17853 \family typewriter
\r
17857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17861 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17896 Portable Document Format
\r
17897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17900 (PDF, file extension
\r
17901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17905 \family typewriter
\r
17909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17913 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
17928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
17931 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
\r
17932 result will not be scalable.
\r
17933 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
\r
17935 \begin_inset Foot
\r
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17939 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
\r
17947 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17948 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
\r
17955 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
17956 Grouping of Image Settings
\r
17957 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
17960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
17961 Images ! Settings grouping
\r
17969 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17970 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
\r
17972 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
\r
17973 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
\r
17975 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
\r
17976 need to manually change each of them.
\r
17980 \begin_layout Standard
\r
17981 A new group can be set by pressing the button
\r
17984 \begin_inset space ~
\r
17988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18011 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18015 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18032 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
\r
18033 and checking the name of the desired group.
\r
18036 \begin_layout Section
\r
18038 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
18049 LatexCommand label
\r
18050 name "sec:Tables"
\r
18057 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18058 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
\r
18059 \begin_inset Info
\r
18061 arg "tabular-insert"
\r
18066 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18070 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
\r
18071 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
\r
18072 from the rest of the table.
\r
18073 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
\r
18074 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
\r
18076 Here is an example table:
\r
18079 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18081 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
\r
18083 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
18084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
\r
18087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18090 \begin_inset Text
\r
18092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18099 \begin_inset Text
\r
18101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18117 \begin_inset Text
\r
18119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18126 \begin_inset Text
\r
18128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18137 \begin_inset Text
\r
18139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18155 \begin_inset Text
\r
18157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18164 \begin_inset Text
\r
18166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18173 \begin_inset Text
\r
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18184 \begin_inset Text
\r
18186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18202 \begin_inset Text
\r
18204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18211 \begin_inset Text
\r
18213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18224 \begin_inset Text
\r
18226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18235 \begin_inset Text
\r
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18253 \begin_inset Text
\r
18255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18262 \begin_inset Text
\r
18264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18271 \begin_inset Text
\r
18273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18287 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
18291 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18292 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
\r
18295 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18299 This brings up the table dialog.
\r
18300 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
\r
18301 cursor is placed currently.
\r
18302 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
\r
18303 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
\r
18304 done on all of your selection.
\r
18307 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18308 In addition to the table dialog, the
\r
18311 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18316 helps you in setting table properties.
\r
18317 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
\r
18320 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18324 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18329 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
\r
18330 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
\r
18331 current cell respectively.
\r
18332 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
\r
18334 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
\r
18335 of text, see section
\r
18336 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
18342 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
\r
18349 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18350 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
\r
18351 using the check box
\r
18360 This will merge the cells to
\r
18364 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
\r
18365 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
\r
18366 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
\r
18367 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
\r
18368 in the last row without the upper border:
\r
18371 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18373 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18374 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
\r
18375 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
18376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18377 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
\r
18378 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
\r
18379 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18382 \begin_inset Text
\r
18384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18390 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18391 \begin_inset Text
\r
18393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18399 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18400 \begin_inset Text
\r
18402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18409 \begin_inset Text
\r
18411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18420 \begin_inset Text
\r
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18438 \begin_inset Text
\r
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18447 \begin_inset Text
\r
18449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18456 \begin_inset Text
\r
18458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18467 \begin_inset Text
\r
18469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18475 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18476 \begin_inset Text
\r
18478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18485 \begin_inset Text
\r
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18494 \begin_inset Text
\r
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18510 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18511 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
\r
18512 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
\r
18513 explained in the chapter
\r
18520 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18526 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
\r
18527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
18530 degrees counterclockwise.
\r
18531 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
\r
18534 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18535 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18543 Most DVI-viewers are
\r
18547 able to display rotations.
\r
18555 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18560 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
\r
18565 adds lines for all cell borders.
\r
18568 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
18570 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18574 Tables ! Longtables
\r
18580 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
18583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18592 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18593 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
\r
18596 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18600 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18609 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
\r
18610 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
\r
18613 \begin_layout Description
\r
18618 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
\r
18619 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
\r
18620 except for the first page, if
\r
18623 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18631 \begin_layout Description
\r
18635 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18640 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
\r
18641 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
\r
18644 \begin_layout Description
\r
18649 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
\r
18650 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
\r
18651 except for the last page, if
\r
18654 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18662 \begin_layout Description
\r
18666 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18671 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
\r
18672 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
\r
18675 \begin_layout Description
\r
18676 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
\r
18677 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
\r
18679 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
18683 More about longtable captions can be found in the
\r
18686 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18694 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18695 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
\r
18696 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
\r
18697 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
\r
18703 In this context, first means first in this order:
\r
18706 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18718 \begin_inset space ~
\r
18723 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
\r
18726 \begin_layout Standard
\r
18728 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
18729 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
\r
18730 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
18731 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
\r
18732 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18733 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
18734 <row endfirsthead="true">
\r
18735 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18736 \begin_inset Text
\r
18738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18741 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
\r
18746 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18747 \begin_inset Text
\r
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18755 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18756 \begin_inset Text
\r
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18765 <row endfirsthead="true">
\r
18766 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18767 \begin_inset Text
\r
18769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18777 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18778 \begin_inset Text
\r
18780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18786 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18787 \begin_inset Text
\r
18789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18798 <row endhead="true">
\r
18799 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18800 \begin_inset Text
\r
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18805 Example Phone List
\r
18810 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18811 \begin_inset Text
\r
18813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18819 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18820 \begin_inset Text
\r
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18829 <row endhead="true">
\r
18830 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18831 \begin_inset Text
\r
18833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18841 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18842 \begin_inset Text
\r
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18850 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18851 \begin_inset Text
\r
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18862 <row endfoot="true">
\r
18863 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18864 \begin_inset Text
\r
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18874 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18875 \begin_inset Text
\r
18877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18883 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18884 \begin_inset Text
\r
18886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18895 \begin_inset Text
\r
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18906 \begin_inset Text
\r
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18914 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18915 \begin_inset Text
\r
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18926 \begin_inset Text
\r
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18937 \begin_inset Text
\r
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18946 \begin_inset Text
\r
18948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18957 \begin_inset Text
\r
18959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18968 \begin_inset Text
\r
18970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18977 \begin_inset Text
\r
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18988 \begin_inset Text
\r
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
18998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
18999 \begin_inset Text
\r
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19008 \begin_inset Text
\r
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19019 \begin_inset Text
\r
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19030 \begin_inset Text
\r
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19039 \begin_inset Text
\r
19041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19050 \begin_inset Text
\r
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19061 \begin_inset Text
\r
19063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19070 \begin_inset Text
\r
19072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19081 \begin_inset Text
\r
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19092 \begin_inset Text
\r
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19101 \begin_inset Text
\r
19103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19112 \begin_inset Text
\r
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19123 \begin_inset Text
\r
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19132 \begin_inset Text
\r
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19143 \begin_inset Text
\r
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19154 \begin_inset Text
\r
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19163 \begin_inset Text
\r
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19174 \begin_inset Text
\r
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19185 \begin_inset Text
\r
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19194 \begin_inset Text
\r
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19205 \begin_inset Text
\r
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19216 \begin_inset Text
\r
19218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19225 \begin_inset Text
\r
19227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19236 \begin_inset Text
\r
19238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19247 \begin_inset Text
\r
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19256 \begin_inset Text
\r
19258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19267 \begin_inset Text
\r
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19278 \begin_inset Text
\r
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19287 \begin_inset Text
\r
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19298 \begin_inset Text
\r
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19309 \begin_inset Text
\r
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19318 \begin_inset Text
\r
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19329 \begin_inset Text
\r
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19340 \begin_inset Text
\r
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19349 \begin_inset Text
\r
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19360 \begin_inset Text
\r
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19371 \begin_inset Text
\r
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19380 \begin_inset Text
\r
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19391 \begin_inset Text
\r
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19402 \begin_inset Text
\r
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19411 \begin_inset Text
\r
19413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19422 \begin_inset Text
\r
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19433 \begin_inset Text
\r
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19442 \begin_inset Text
\r
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19453 \begin_inset Text
\r
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19464 \begin_inset Text
\r
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19473 \begin_inset Text
\r
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19484 \begin_inset Text
\r
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19495 \begin_inset Text
\r
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19504 \begin_inset Text
\r
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19515 \begin_inset Text
\r
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19526 \begin_inset Text
\r
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19535 \begin_inset Text
\r
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19546 \begin_inset Text
\r
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19557 \begin_inset Text
\r
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19566 \begin_inset Text
\r
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19577 \begin_inset Text
\r
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19588 \begin_inset Text
\r
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19597 \begin_inset Text
\r
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19608 \begin_inset Text
\r
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19619 \begin_inset Text
\r
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19628 \begin_inset Text
\r
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19639 \begin_inset Text
\r
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19650 \begin_inset Text
\r
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19659 \begin_inset Text
\r
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19670 \begin_inset Text
\r
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19681 \begin_inset Text
\r
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19690 \begin_inset Text
\r
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19701 \begin_inset Text
\r
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19712 \begin_inset Text
\r
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19721 \begin_inset Text
\r
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19732 \begin_inset Text
\r
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19743 \begin_inset Text
\r
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19752 \begin_inset Text
\r
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19763 \begin_inset Text
\r
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19774 \begin_inset Text
\r
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19783 \begin_inset Text
\r
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19794 \begin_inset Text
\r
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19805 \begin_inset Text
\r
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19814 \begin_inset Text
\r
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19825 \begin_inset Text
\r
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19836 \begin_inset Text
\r
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19845 \begin_inset Text
\r
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19855 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19856 \begin_inset Text
\r
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19864 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19865 \begin_inset Text
\r
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19873 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19874 \begin_inset Text
\r
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19885 \begin_inset Text
\r
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19896 \begin_inset Text
\r
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19905 \begin_inset Text
\r
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19916 \begin_inset Text
\r
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19927 \begin_inset Text
\r
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19936 \begin_inset Text
\r
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19947 \begin_inset Text
\r
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19958 \begin_inset Text
\r
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19967 \begin_inset Text
\r
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19978 \begin_inset Text
\r
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19989 \begin_inset Text
\r
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
19998 \begin_inset Text
\r
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20009 \begin_inset Text
\r
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20020 \begin_inset Text
\r
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20029 \begin_inset Text
\r
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20040 \begin_inset Text
\r
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20051 \begin_inset Text
\r
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20060 \begin_inset Text
\r
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20071 \begin_inset Text
\r
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20082 \begin_inset Text
\r
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20091 \begin_inset Text
\r
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20102 \begin_inset Text
\r
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20113 \begin_inset Text
\r
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20122 \begin_inset Text
\r
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20133 \begin_inset Text
\r
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20144 \begin_inset Text
\r
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20153 \begin_inset Text
\r
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20164 \begin_inset Text
\r
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20175 \begin_inset Text
\r
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20184 \begin_inset Text
\r
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20195 \begin_inset Text
\r
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20206 \begin_inset Text
\r
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20215 \begin_inset Text
\r
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20226 \begin_inset Text
\r
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20237 \begin_inset Text
\r
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20246 \begin_inset Text
\r
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20257 \begin_inset Text
\r
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20268 \begin_inset Text
\r
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20277 \begin_inset Text
\r
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20288 \begin_inset Text
\r
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20299 \begin_inset Text
\r
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20308 \begin_inset Text
\r
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20319 \begin_inset Text
\r
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20330 \begin_inset Text
\r
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20339 \begin_inset Text
\r
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20350 \begin_inset Text
\r
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20361 \begin_inset Text
\r
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20370 \begin_inset Text
\r
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20380 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20381 \begin_inset Text
\r
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20392 \begin_inset Text
\r
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20401 \begin_inset Text
\r
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20412 \begin_inset Text
\r
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20423 \begin_inset Text
\r
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20432 \begin_inset Text
\r
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20443 \begin_inset Text
\r
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20454 \begin_inset Text
\r
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20463 \begin_inset Text
\r
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20473 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20474 \begin_inset Text
\r
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20485 \begin_inset Text
\r
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20494 \begin_inset Text
\r
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20504 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20505 \begin_inset Text
\r
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20516 \begin_inset Text
\r
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20525 \begin_inset Text
\r
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20536 \begin_inset Text
\r
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20547 \begin_inset Text
\r
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20556 \begin_inset Text
\r
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20566 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20567 \begin_inset Text
\r
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20578 \begin_inset Text
\r
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20587 \begin_inset Text
\r
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20597 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20598 \begin_inset Text
\r
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20609 \begin_inset Text
\r
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20618 \begin_inset Text
\r
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20628 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20629 \begin_inset Text
\r
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20640 \begin_inset Text
\r
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20649 \begin_inset Text
\r
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20659 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20660 \begin_inset Text
\r
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20671 \begin_inset Text
\r
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20680 \begin_inset Text
\r
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20690 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20691 \begin_inset Text
\r
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20702 \begin_inset Text
\r
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20711 \begin_inset Text
\r
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20721 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20722 \begin_inset Text
\r
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20733 \begin_inset Text
\r
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20742 \begin_inset Text
\r
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20753 \begin_inset Text
\r
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20764 \begin_inset Text
\r
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20773 \begin_inset Text
\r
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20784 \begin_inset Text
\r
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20795 \begin_inset Text
\r
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20804 \begin_inset Text
\r
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20815 \begin_inset Text
\r
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20826 \begin_inset Text
\r
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20835 \begin_inset Text
\r
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20844 <row endlastfoot="true">
\r
20845 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20846 \begin_inset Text
\r
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20856 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20857 \begin_inset Text
\r
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20865 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20866 \begin_inset Text
\r
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20882 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
20884 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
20895 LatexCommand label
\r
20896 name "sub:Table-Cells"
\r
20903 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20904 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
\r
20905 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
\r
20906 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
\r
20907 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
\r
20911 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
\r
20914 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20915 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
\r
20916 for the column in the table dialog.
\r
20917 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
\r
20918 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
\r
20922 \begin_layout Standard
\r
20924 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
20925 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
\r
20926 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
20927 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
20928 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
\r
20929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20932 \begin_inset Text
\r
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20949 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20950 \begin_inset Text
\r
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20968 \begin_inset Text
\r
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
20988 \begin_inset Text
\r
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21006 \begin_inset Text
\r
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21018 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
\r
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21024 \begin_inset Text
\r
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21044 \begin_inset Text
\r
21046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21062 \begin_inset Text
\r
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21074 This is longer now.
\r
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21080 \begin_inset Text
\r
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21100 \begin_inset Text
\r
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21118 \begin_inset Text
\r
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21130 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
\r
21131 This is longer now.
\r
21136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21137 \begin_inset Text
\r
21139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21162 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21163 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
\r
21164 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
\r
21165 \begin_inset Foot
\r
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21169 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
\r
21170 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
\r
21176 Selection with the mouse or with
\r
21180 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
\r
21181 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
\r
21182 the selection from outside the table.
\r
21185 \begin_layout Section
\r
21187 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21198 LatexCommand label
\r
21199 name "sec:Floats"
\r
21206 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21210 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21211 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
\r
21212 have a fixed location.
\r
21214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21221 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
\r
21229 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21234 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
\r
21235 too many notes on the current page.
\r
21238 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21239 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
\r
21240 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
\r
21241 and pages without text.
\r
21242 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
\r
21243 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
\r
21244 Floats are therefore numbered.
\r
21245 Referencing is described in section
\r
21246 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21252 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
21259 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21260 To insert a float, use the menu
\r
21262 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21266 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
\r
21267 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
\r
21269 After the label you can insert the caption text.
\r
21270 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21274 Floats ! Captions
\r
21279 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
\r
21280 paragraph within the float.
\r
21281 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
\r
21282 by left-clicking on the box label.
\r
21283 A closed float box looks like this:
\r
21284 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21285 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
\r
21290 – a gray button with a red label.
\r
21293 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21294 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
\r
21295 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
\r
21298 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
21304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21305 LatexCommand label
\r
21306 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
\r
21311 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21315 Floats ! Figure floats
\r
21323 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21325 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21331 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
\r
21335 was created using the menu
\r
21337 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21338 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21342 \begin_inset Info
\r
21344 arg "float-insert figure"
\r
21348 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
\r
21351 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21355 \begin_inset Info
\r
21357 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
21361 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
\r
21362 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
\r
21364 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21366 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21372 \begin_inset Info
\r
21374 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
21380 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21381 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21388 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21389 filename clipart/platypus.eps
\r
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21399 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21403 LatexCommand label
\r
21404 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
\r
21408 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
\r
21421 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21422 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
\r
21423 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
\r
21425 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21429 \begin_inset Info
\r
21431 arg "label-insert"
\r
21434 ) and refer to it using the menu
\r
21436 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21440 \begin_inset Info
\r
21442 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
21446 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
\r
21447 vague references like
\r
21448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21455 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
\r
21457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
21461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
21465 For more about cross-references, see section
\r
21466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21472 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
21479 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21480 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
\r
21481 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
\r
21482 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
\r
21483 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
\r
21484 as described in section
\r
21485 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21491 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
\r
21497 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21503 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
21507 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
\r
21508 You can also set the images one below the other.
\r
21510 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21516 reference "fig:Undefinable"
\r
21521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21523 reference "fig:Platypus"
\r
21527 are the subfigures.
\r
21530 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21531 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21541 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21547 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21551 LatexCommand label
\r
21552 name "fig:Undefinable"
\r
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21565 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21566 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
\r
21577 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21581 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21587 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21591 LatexCommand label
\r
21592 name "fig:Platypus"
\r
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21605 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
21606 filename clipart/platypus.eps
\r
21618 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
21624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21625 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21629 LatexCommand label
\r
21630 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
21634 Two distorted images.
\r
21647 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
21649 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21653 Floats ! Table floats
\r
21661 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21662 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
\r
21664 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21665 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21668 or the toolbar button
\r
21669 \begin_inset Info
\r
21671 arg "float-insert table"
\r
21675 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
\r
21676 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
\r
21677 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
\r
21679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
21685 reference "tab:Table-float"
\r
21689 is a table float.
\r
21692 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21693 \begin_inset Float table
\r
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21699 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21703 LatexCommand label
\r
21704 name "tab:Table-float"
\r
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21718 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
21719 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
\r
21720 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
21721 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21726 \begin_inset Text
\r
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21744 \begin_inset Text
\r
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21762 \begin_inset Text
\r
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21782 \begin_inset Text
\r
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21800 \begin_inset Text
\r
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21818 \begin_inset Text
\r
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21838 \begin_inset Text
\r
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21850 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
\r
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21859 \begin_inset Text
\r
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21871 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
21874 \end{array}\right]$
\r
21882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
21883 \begin_inset Text
\r
21885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21895 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
\r
21916 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
21918 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21930 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21931 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
\r
21932 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
\r
21933 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
\r
21935 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
\r
21943 \begin_inset space ~
\r
21951 \begin_layout Section
\r
21953 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
21963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
21964 LatexCommand label
\r
21965 name "sec:Minipages"
\r
21972 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21973 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
\r
21974 called a minipage.
\r
21975 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
\r
21976 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
21983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21984 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
\r
21986 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
21990 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
\r
21991 and its alignment within the page.
\r
21994 \begin_layout Standard
\r
21996 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22006 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22012 This is a minipage.
\r
22013 The text is set in an italic style.
\r
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22019 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
\r
22020 another formatting.
\r
22028 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22029 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
22032 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
\r
22036 as described in section
\r
22037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
22043 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
22048 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
22054 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22055 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22065 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22069 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
\r
22070 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
\r
22076 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
\r
22080 \begin_inset Box Frameless
\r
22090 height_special "totalheight"
\r
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22094 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
\r
22095 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
\r
22103 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22104 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
22110 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22111 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
\r
22113 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
\r
22120 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22128 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
22129 Mathematical Formulas
\r
22130 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22140 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
22173 LatexCommand label
\r
22174 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
22181 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22182 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
\r
22187 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
\r
22190 \begin_layout Section
\r
22191 Basic Math Editing
\r
22192 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22204 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22205 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
\r
22206 \begin_inset Info
\r
22208 arg "math-mode on"
\r
22212 \begin_inset Info
\r
22218 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
\r
22220 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
\r
22221 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
\r
22222 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
\r
22224 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22230 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22231 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
\r
22235 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22240 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
\r
22243 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22244 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
\r
22245 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
\r
22248 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22249 This is a line with an inline formula
\r
22250 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
\r
22256 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22257 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
\r
22258 paragraph, like this one:
\r
22259 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22266 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
\r
22269 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22270 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
\r
22271 For example, typing
\r
22272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22285 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
\r
22286 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
\r
22290 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
\r
22293 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22301 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22302 Navigating in Formulas
\r
22303 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22307 Math ! Navigating
\r
22315 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22316 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
\r
22317 achieved with the arrow keys.
\r
22318 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
\r
22319 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
\r
22324 will leave a formula construct (a square root
\r
22325 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
\r
22328 , or parentheses
\r
22329 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
\r
22333 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
22336 \end{array}\right]$
\r
22344 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
\r
22349 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
\r
22350 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
\r
22353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22358 , printed in this document as
\r
22359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22380 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22384 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
\r
22385 the space character (visible space).
\r
22390 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
\r
22391 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
\r
22392 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
\r
22397 For example, if you want
\r
22398 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
\r
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22452 , since in the latter case only the
\r
22453 \family typewriter
\r
22455 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
\r
22460 will be under the square root sign:
\r
22461 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
\r
22467 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22468 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
\r
22470 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22472 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
\r
22476 \end{array}\right)
\r
22481 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
\r
22482 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
\r
22485 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22489 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22490 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
\r
22491 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
\r
22495 and a cursor movement key to select text.
\r
22496 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
\r
22497 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
\r
22498 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
\r
22499 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
\r
22502 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22503 Exponents and Subscripts
\r
22504 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22514 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22518 Math ! Subscripts
\r
22526 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22527 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
\r
22528 \begin_inset Info
\r
22530 arg "math-superscript"
\r
22534 \begin_inset Info
\r
22536 arg "math-subscript"
\r
22539 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
\r
22541 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
\r
22544 , type in a formula
\r
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22566 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
\r
22572 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
\r
22576 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
\r
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22597 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
\r
22599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22606 , you have to use an extra
\r
22610 to separate the circumflex and the character.
\r
22611 For example, if you want
\r
22612 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
\r
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22633 Subscripts are similar: To get
\r
22634 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
\r
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22657 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22659 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22671 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22672 Create a fraction either with the command
\r
22678 or by using the icon
\r
22679 \begin_inset Info
\r
22681 arg "math-insert \\frac"
\r
22687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22693 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
\r
22694 The cursor is above the fraction line.
\r
22695 To move it to the bottom, simply press
\r
22700 To move back up, press
\r
22705 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
\r
22706 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22708 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
\r
22711 \end{array}\right)}\right]
\r
22719 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22721 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22733 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22734 Roots can be created using the
\r
22737 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22743 \begin_inset Info
\r
22745 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
\r
22749 \begin_inset Info
\r
22751 arg "math-insert \\root"
\r
22767 With the command
\r
22773 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
\r
22779 always produces a square root.
\r
22782 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22783 Operators with Limits
\r
22784 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22794 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
22805 LatexCommand label
\r
22806 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
\r
22813 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22815 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
\r
22819 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
\r
22822 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
\r
22823 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
\r
22824 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
\r
22825 The sum operator will automatically place its
\r
22826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22833 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
\r
22835 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
\r
22839 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22841 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
\r
22846 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
\r
22850 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22851 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
\r
22853 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
\r
22854 behind the operator and using the menu
\r
22856 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22857 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
22859 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22863 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22869 \begin_inset Info
\r
22871 arg "math-limits"
\r
22877 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22878 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
\r
22879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22887 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22897 \begin_inset Formula
\r
22899 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
\r
22904 which will place the
\r
22905 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
\r
22909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
22913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
22917 In inline formulas it looks like this:
\r
22918 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
\r
22924 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22925 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
\r
22932 Have a look at section
\r
22933 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
22939 reference "sub:Functions"
\r
22943 for an explanation of function macros.
\r
22946 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
22948 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
22960 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22961 Most math symbols can be found in the
\r
22964 \begin_inset space ~
\r
22969 under one of several categories; including
\r
22986 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
\r
22990 \begin_layout Standard
\r
22991 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
\r
22992 you don't have to use the
\r
22995 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23000 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
\r
23001 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
\r
23004 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23006 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23018 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23019 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
\r
23021 To do this, press
\r
23022 \begin_inset Info
\r
23024 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
\r
23030 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23038 \begin_inset Info
\r
23040 arg "math-insert \\space"
\r
23046 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
\r
23047 For example, the sequence
\r
23052 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
\r
23055 appears in LyX as
\r
23056 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
23057 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
\r
23062 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
\r
23063 the space marker and enter space again several times.
\r
23064 With every space enter the size will be changed.
\r
23065 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
\r
23067 Here are two examples:
\r
23070 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23080 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
\r
23086 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23096 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
\r
23102 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23104 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23115 LatexCommand label
\r
23116 name "sub:Functions"
\r
23123 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23127 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23132 contains under the button
\r
23135 \begin_inset Info
\r
23137 arg "math-insert \\functions"
\r
23142 a number of function macros, such as
\r
23143 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
\r
23147 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
\r
23155 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
\r
23162 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
\r
23163 avoid confusions, because
\r
23164 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
\r
23167 does normally mean
\r
23168 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
\r
23174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23175 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
\r
23177 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
\r
23180 is different from
\r
23181 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
\r
23187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23188 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
\r
23189 are placed, as described in section
\r
23190 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
23196 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
\r
23203 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
23205 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23218 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
\r
23220 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
\r
23221 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
\r
23222 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
\r
23225 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
\r
23226 Our example is entered by typing
\r
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23247 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
23253 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
\r
23257 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
\r
23260 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23261 \begin_inset Float table
\r
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23267 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23271 LatexCommand label
\r
23272 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
\r
23276 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
\r
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23286 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
23287 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
\r
23288 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
23289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23290 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
23293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23294 \begin_inset Text
\r
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23303 \begin_inset Text
\r
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23312 \begin_inset Text
\r
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23332 \begin_inset Text
\r
23334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23350 \begin_inset Text
\r
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23363 \begin_inset Text
\r
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23375 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
\r
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23386 \begin_inset Text
\r
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23404 \begin_inset Text
\r
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23417 \begin_inset Text
\r
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23429 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
\r
23439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23440 \begin_inset Text
\r
23442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23458 \begin_inset Text
\r
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23471 \begin_inset Text
\r
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23483 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
\r
23493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23494 \begin_inset Text
\r
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23512 \begin_inset Text
\r
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23525 \begin_inset Text
\r
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23537 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
\r
23547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23548 \begin_inset Text
\r
23550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23566 \begin_inset Text
\r
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23579 \begin_inset Text
\r
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23591 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
\r
23601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23602 \begin_inset Text
\r
23604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23620 \begin_inset Text
\r
23622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23633 \begin_inset Text
\r
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23645 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
\r
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23656 \begin_inset Text
\r
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23674 \begin_inset Text
\r
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23687 \begin_inset Text
\r
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23699 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
\r
23709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23710 \begin_inset Text
\r
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23728 \begin_inset Text
\r
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23741 \begin_inset Text
\r
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23753 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
\r
23763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23764 \begin_inset Text
\r
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23782 \begin_inset Text
\r
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23795 \begin_inset Text
\r
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23807 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
\r
23817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23818 \begin_inset Text
\r
23820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23827 \begin_inset Text
\r
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
23840 \begin_inset Text
\r
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23852 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
\r
23873 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23874 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
\r
23877 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23882 symbol set button
\r
23883 \begin_inset Info
\r
23885 arg "math-insert \\hat"
\r
23888 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
\r
23892 \begin_layout Section
\r
23893 Brackets and Delimiters
\r
23894 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23904 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
23908 Math ! Delimiters
\r
23914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
23915 LatexCommand label
\r
23916 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
\r
23923 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23924 There are several brackets available through LyX.
\r
23925 For some purposes, using just the keys
\r
23926 \family typewriter
\r
23930 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
\r
23931 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
\r
23932 toolbar delimiter icon
\r
23933 \begin_inset Info
\r
23935 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
\r
23939 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
\r
23940 \begin_inset Formula
\r
23942 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
\r
23945 \end{array}\right]
\r
23950 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
\r
23951 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
\r
23953 \begin_inset Info
\r
23955 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
\r
23958 and the expression on the right was entered using the
\r
23959 \family typewriter
\r
23964 \begin_inset Formula
\r
23966 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
\r
23974 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23975 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
\r
23976 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
\r
23980 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23981 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
\r
23982 left side and right side.
\r
23983 If you use the option
\r
23986 \begin_inset space ~
\r
23991 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
\r
23992 The selection will be shown below the button field.
\r
23993 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use the blank button.
\r
23994 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
\r
23997 \begin_layout Standard
\r
23998 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
\r
23999 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
\r
24000 go inside the brackets.
\r
24001 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
\r
24006 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
\r
24007 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
\r
24008 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
\r
24009 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
\r
24010 the structure and enter
\r
24011 \begin_inset Info
\r
24013 arg "math-delim ( )"
\r
24019 \begin_layout Section
\r
24020 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
\r
24021 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24031 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24041 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24045 Math ! Multi-line Equations
\r
24053 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24054 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
\r
24057 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24065 \begin_inset Info
\r
24067 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
\r
24073 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
\r
24074 Here is an example:
\r
24075 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24077 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
\r
24081 \end{array}\right)
\r
24086 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
\r
24087 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24093 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
\r
24098 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
\r
24099 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
\r
24100 This alignment is set in the box
\r
24104 with the letters
\r
24105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24153 for every column as default.
\r
24154 For example, the sequence
\r
24155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24166 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
\r
24167 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
\r
24168 corresponds to the relevant column.
\r
24169 The result will look like this:
\r
24170 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24172 \begin{array}{lcr}
\r
24173 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
\r
24174 column & has & has\, right\\
\r
24175 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
\r
24184 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24185 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
\r
24186 \begin_inset Info
\r
24188 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24191 while the cursor is in the matrix.
\r
24192 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
\r
24194 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24197 or the math toolbar.
\r
24200 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24201 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
\r
24202 It can be created with the menu
\r
24204 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24205 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24207 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24219 Here is an example:
\r
24220 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24222 f(x)=\begin{cases}
\r
24234 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24235 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
24238 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
\r
24239 \begin_inset Info
\r
24241 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24244 within a formula.
\r
24245 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
\r
24248 \begin_inset Info
\r
24250 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24253 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
\r
24254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24261 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
\r
24262 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
\r
24263 A new row is created by every further entry of
\r
24264 \begin_inset Info
\r
24266 arg "newline-insert newline"
\r
24270 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
\r
24271 Here is an example:
\r
24272 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24274 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
\r
24275 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
\r
24280 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
\r
24281 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
\r
24282 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24283 \begin{eqnarray*}
\r
24284 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
\r
24292 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24293 The multi-line formula type described here is called
\r
24294 \family typewriter
\r
24300 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
\r
24301 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
\r
24302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24303 LatexCommand eqref
\r
24304 reference "eq:asquared"
\r
24309 The other types are described in section
\r
24310 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24316 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
\r
24323 \begin_layout Section
\r
24324 Formula Numbering and Referencing
\r
24325 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24329 Math ! Formula numbering
\r
24335 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24339 Math ! Referencing formulas
\r
24345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
24346 LatexCommand label
\r
24347 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
\r
24354 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24355 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
\r
24357 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24358 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24360 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24364 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24370 \begin_inset Info
\r
24372 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24376 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
\r
24377 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
\r
24378 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
\r
24379 the document class.
\r
24380 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
\r
24381 separated by a dot:
\r
24382 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24390 \begin_inset Info
\r
24392 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24395 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
\r
24396 You can only number displayed formulas.
\r
24399 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24400 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
\r
24402 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24403 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24405 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24409 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24415 \begin_inset Info
\r
24417 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
\r
24420 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
\r
24421 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24424 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
\r
24430 To number all lines use the shortcut
\r
24431 \begin_inset Info
\r
24433 arg "math-number-toggle"
\r
24439 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24440 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
24443 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
\r
24444 A label is inserted with the menu
\r
24446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24450 \begin_inset Info
\r
24452 arg "label-insert"
\r
24455 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
\r
24456 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
\r
24457 It is recommended that you use the suggested
\r
24458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24469 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
\r
24470 label type when you have many labels in your document.
\r
24471 We inserted in the following example the label
\r
24472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24479 in the second line:
\r
24480 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24482 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
\r
24483 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
\r
24488 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
\r
24489 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
\r
24490 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
\r
24492 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
24494 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24500 \begin_inset Info
\r
24502 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
24506 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
\r
24507 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
\r
24508 as the formula number:
\r
24511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24512 This is a cross-reference to equation (
\r
24513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24515 reference "eq:tanhExp"
\r
24522 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24523 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
\r
24524 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24530 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
24535 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
\r
24543 \begin_layout Section
\r
24544 User defined math macros
\r
24545 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24557 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24558 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
\r
24559 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
\r
24560 Math macros are explained in section
\r
24563 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24575 \begin_layout Section
\r
24579 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
24581 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24593 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24594 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
\r
24595 To set a font in a formula, use the
\r
24598 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24606 \begin_inset Info
\r
24608 arg "math-insert \\font"
\r
24613 , or enter its command, listed in table
\r
24614 \begin_inset space ~
\r
24618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
24620 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
\r
24627 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24628 \begin_inset Float table
\r
24633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24634 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
24636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
24638 LatexCommand label
\r
24639 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
\r
24643 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
\r
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24653 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
24654 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
\r
24655 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
24656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
24657 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
\r
24659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24660 \begin_inset Text
\r
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24669 \begin_inset Text
\r
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24680 \begin_inset Text
\r
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24689 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
\r
24697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24698 \begin_inset Text
\r
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24713 \begin_inset Text
\r
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24716 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
\r
24724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24725 \begin_inset Text
\r
24727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24740 \begin_inset Text
\r
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24743 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
\r
24751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24752 \begin_inset Text
\r
24754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24767 \begin_inset Text
\r
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24776 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
\r
24784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24785 \begin_inset Text
\r
24787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24800 \begin_inset Text
\r
24802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24803 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
\r
24811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24812 \begin_inset Text
\r
24814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24827 \begin_inset Text
\r
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24830 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
\r
24838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24839 \begin_inset Text
\r
24841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24854 \begin_inset Text
\r
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24864 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
\r
24872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24873 \begin_inset Text
\r
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24888 \begin_inset Text
\r
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24891 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
\r
24899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
24900 \begin_inset Text
\r
24902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24925 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24926 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
24934 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
\r
24950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24951 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
\r
24952 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
\r
24957 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
\r
24958 space when you need a space in the box.
\r
24959 Here is an example where
\r
24960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
24964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
24971 denotes the set of numbers:
\r
24972 \begin_inset Formula
\r
24974 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
\r
24982 \begin_layout Standard
\r
24983 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
\r
24984 You can, for example, put a character in
\r
24993 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
\r
24997 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25000 So it is better not to use this feature.
\r
25003 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25004 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
\r
25005 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
\r
25009 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25012 You can only print them emboldened using the command
\r
25018 , which works like the other typeface commands:
\r
25019 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
\r
25025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25032 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
\r
25035 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25036 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
\r
25038 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25039 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25041 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25049 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25051 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25063 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25064 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
\r
25066 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
\r
25070 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25074 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25082 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25090 \begin_inset Info
\r
25092 arg "math-insert \\font"
\r
25098 \begin_inset Info
\r
25100 arg "font-default"
\r
25104 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
\r
25105 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
\r
25106 Here is an example:
\r
25107 \begin_inset Formula
\r
25109 f(x)=\begin{cases}
\r
25110 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
\r
25111 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
\r
25120 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25122 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25126 Math ! Font sizes
\r
25134 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25135 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
\r
25136 automatically chosen in most situations.
\r
25137 These are called
\r
25151 scriptscriptstyle
\r
25154 For most characters,
\r
25162 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
\r
25163 and certain other structures, are set larger in
\r
25168 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
\r
25169 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
\r
25171 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
\r
25174 \begin_inset Info
\r
25176 arg "math-insert \\style"
\r
25182 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
\r
25183 For example, you can set
\r
25184 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
\r
25187 , which is normally in
\r
25196 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
\r
25200 The four styles are used in the following example:
\r
25203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25204 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
\r
25208 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
\r
25212 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
\r
25216 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
\r
25222 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25223 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
\r
25224 is set in a particular size with the menu
\r
25226 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25228 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25233 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
\r
25234 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
\r
25235 will be adjusted to correspond.
\r
25236 As an example here is a formula in the font size
\r
25237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25247 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25251 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
\r
25257 \begin_layout Section
\r
25259 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25269 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25281 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25282 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
\r
25283 (AMS) that are in common use.
\r
25286 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25287 Enabling AMS-Support
\r
25290 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25291 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
\r
25292 the document by selecting the checkbox
\r
25295 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25303 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25310 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25314 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25318 Document ! Settings
\r
25326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25332 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
\r
25333 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
\r
25336 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
25337 AMS-Formula Types
\r
25338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25339 LatexCommand label
\r
25340 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
\r
25345 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25349 Math ! Multi-line Equations
\r
25357 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25358 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
\r
25359 LyX allows you to choose between
\r
25360 \family typewriter
\r
25364 \family typewriter
\r
25368 \family typewriter
\r
25372 \family typewriter
\r
25376 \family typewriter
\r
25380 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
\r
25381 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
25382 LatexCommand cite
\r
25387 , for an explanation of these formula types.
\r
25390 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
25394 \begin_layout Section
\r
25396 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25407 LatexCommand label
\r
25408 name "sec:Cross-References"
\r
25415 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25416 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
\r
25417 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
\r
25419 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
\r
25420 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
\r
25421 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
\r
25424 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25428 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
25430 LatexCommand label
\r
25431 name "enu:Second-item"
\r
25438 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
25442 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25443 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
\r
25445 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25448 or by pressing the toolbar button
\r
25449 \begin_inset Info
\r
25451 arg "label-insert"
\r
25455 A gray label box like this:
\r
25456 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
25457 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
\r
25462 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
\r
25463 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
\r
25465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25498 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
\r
25499 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
\r
25501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25515 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25516 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
\r
25518 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25521 or the toolbar button
\r
25522 \begin_inset Info
\r
25524 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
25528 A gray cross-reference box like this:
\r
25529 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
25530 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
\r
25535 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
\r
25537 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
\r
25538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25550 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
\r
25554 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25555 As an alternative to
\r
25557 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25560 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
\r
25562 Copy as Reference
\r
25565 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
\r
25566 to the actual cursor position via the menu
\r
25568 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25572 \begin_inset Info
\r
25580 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25581 Here is our cross-reference: Item
\r
25582 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25588 reference "enu:Second-item"
\r
25595 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25596 It is recommended to use a protected space
\r
25597 \begin_inset Foot
\r
25600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25601 described in section
\r
25602 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25608 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
25617 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
\r
25618 line breaks between them.
\r
25621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25622 There are six formats of cross-references:
\r
25625 \begin_layout Description
\r
25626 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
\r
25627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25629 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25636 \begin_layout Description
\r
25637 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
\r
25638 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
\r
25640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25649 LatexCommand eqref
\r
25650 reference "eq:tanhExp"
\r
25657 \begin_layout Description
\r
25658 <page>: prints the page number: Page
\r
25659 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25664 LatexCommand pageref
\r
25665 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25672 \begin_layout Description
\r
25674 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25678 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25681 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
\r
25682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25683 LatexCommand vpageref
\r
25684 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25689 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25692 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
\r
25693 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
\r
25694 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
\r
25695 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
\r
25696 it prints “on the next page”.
\r
25697 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
\r
25700 \begin_layout Description
\r
25702 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25706 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25710 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25713 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
\r
25714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25715 LatexCommand vref
\r
25716 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25721 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25724 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
\r
25730 ; otherwise it behaves like
\r
25734 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25738 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25747 \begin_layout Description
\r
25749 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25752 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
\r
25753 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25765 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
\r
25774 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25778 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
25784 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
25787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
25788 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
25799 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25802 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
\r
25805 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
\r
25809 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25810 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
25818 is the default and preferred because
\r
25822 supports only English documents.
\r
25823 The format is specified by using the command
\r
25835 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
\r
25836 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
\r
25838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25849 ) can be done with this command
\r
25850 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25857 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
\r
25862 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
25865 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
\r
25867 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
25868 LatexCommand cite
\r
25869 key "prettyref,refstyle"
\r
25876 \begin_layout Description
\r
25878 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25881 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
\r
25882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25883 LatexCommand nameref
\r
25884 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
\r
25891 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25892 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
\r
25893 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
\r
25894 The varieties are adjusted in the field
\r
25898 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
\r
25902 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25903 You can only use the style
\r
25907 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
\r
25911 is always possible.
\r
25914 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25915 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
\r
25916 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
\r
25918 Referencing formulas is explained in section
\r
25919 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
25925 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
\r
25932 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25933 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
\r
25937 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25941 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25946 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
\r
25947 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
\r
25950 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25955 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
\r
25956 You can also go back with the toolbar button
\r
25957 \begin_inset Info
\r
25959 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
25965 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25966 You can change labels at any time.
\r
25967 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
\r
25968 do not need to think about this.
\r
25971 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25972 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
\r
25973 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
\r
25974 instead of the reference.
\r
25977 \begin_layout Standard
\r
25978 References are described in detail in the section
\r
25979 \begin_inset space ~
\r
25983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
25986 Referencing Floats
\r
25987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
25993 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26001 \begin_layout Section
\r
26002 Table of Contents and other Listings
\r
26003 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26007 Table of contents
\r
26013 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26024 LatexCommand label
\r
26032 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26033 Table of Contents
\r
26034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26035 LatexCommand label
\r
26036 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
\r
26043 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26044 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
\r
26046 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26047 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26049 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26053 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26059 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
\r
26060 If you click on it, the
\r
26064 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
\r
26065 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
\r
26066 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
\r
26068 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26071 that is described in sec.
\r
26072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
26076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26078 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
\r
26085 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26086 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
\r
26087 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
\r
26089 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26095 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
26099 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
\r
26101 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26107 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
26111 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
\r
26112 listed in the TOC.
\r
26113 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
\r
26116 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26117 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
\r
26118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26119 LatexCommand label
\r
26120 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
\r
26127 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26128 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
\r
26129 You can insert them via the
\r
26131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26135 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
\r
26138 \begin_layout Section
\r
26139 URLs and Hyperlinks
\r
26140 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26150 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26162 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26165 LatexCommand label
\r
26173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26174 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
\r
26176 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26182 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26183 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
\r
26184 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26189 http://www.lyx.org
\r
26197 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26198 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
\r
26200 \family typewriter
\r
26204 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
\r
26208 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
26212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26217 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
\r
26225 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26228 LatexCommand label
\r
26229 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
\r
26236 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26237 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
\r
26239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26242 or with the toolbar button
\r
26243 \begin_inset Info
\r
26245 arg "href-insert"
\r
26249 The appearing dialog has two fields:
\r
26258 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
\r
26259 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
\r
26260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26261 LatexCommand href
\r
26262 name "LyX's homepage"
\r
26263 target "http://www.lyx.org"
\r
26267 , an Email address like this:
\r
26268 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26269 LatexCommand href
\r
26270 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
\r
26271 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
\r
26276 , or a link to a file.
\r
26279 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26280 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
\r
26281 adding the prefix
\r
26282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26293 to the link target.
\r
26296 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26297 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
\r
26298 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
\r
26299 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
\r
26300 the text style dialog.
\r
26301 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
\r
26305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26306 LatexCommand href
\r
26307 name "LyX's homepage"
\r
26308 target "http://www.lyx.org"
\r
26315 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26316 The link text color can be changed, when the option
\r
26320 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
\r
26322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26323 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26327 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
\r
26329 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26337 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26342 Additional options
\r
26344 in the PDF Properties dialog.
\r
26347 \begin_layout Section
\r
26349 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26360 LatexCommand label
\r
26361 name "sec:Appendices"
\r
26368 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26369 Appendices are created with the menu
\r
26371 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26373 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26377 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26383 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
\r
26384 as the appendix part of the book.
\r
26385 This part is marked with a red borderline.
\r
26388 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26389 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
\r
26390 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
\r
26391 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
\r
26392 and the subsection number.
\r
26393 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
\r
26394 here two examples:
\r
26397 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26399 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26405 reference "chap:Credits"
\r
26410 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26416 reference "sub:Export"
\r
26423 \begin_layout Section
\r
26425 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26436 LatexCommand label
\r
26437 name "sec:Bibliography"
\r
26444 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26445 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
\r
26446 You can include a bibliography database,
\r
26447 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26451 Known under the name
\r
26452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26464 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
\r
26465 manually, using the paragraph environment
\r
26469 , which was described in section
\r
26470 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
26476 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
\r
26481 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
\r
26482 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
\r
26486 use a bibliography database.
\r
26489 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26490 The Bibliography Environment
\r
26493 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26498 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
\r
26500 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
\r
26509 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
\r
26511 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
\r
26513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26520 , a short form of its title, as the key.
\r
26523 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26524 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
\r
26526 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26529 or the toolbar button
\r
26530 \begin_inset Info
\r
26532 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
\r
26536 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
\r
26537 containing the available citations.
\r
26538 Select one or more keys from the list and
\r
26548 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
\r
26549 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
\r
26553 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26554 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
\r
26555 entry with surrounding brackets.
\r
26560 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
\r
26561 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
\r
26563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26573 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26574 Have a look at the
\r
26576 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
\r
26579 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26580 LatexCommand cite
\r
26581 key "latexcompanion"
\r
26588 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26589 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
\r
26590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26591 LatexCommand cite
\r
26599 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26600 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
\r
26601 label via the menu
\r
26603 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26605 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26611 \begin_inset Info
\r
26613 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
26617 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
\r
26620 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26621 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
\r
26622 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26626 Bibliography ! Databases
\r
26632 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26636 Bibliography ! BibTeX
\r
26642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
26643 LatexCommand label
\r
26644 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
26651 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26652 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
\r
26654 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26658 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
\r
26660 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
\r
26661 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
\r
26666 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
\r
26668 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
\r
26669 your working field in a database.
\r
26670 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
\r
26671 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
\r
26672 list for that document.
\r
26673 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
\r
26677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26678 The database is a text file with the file extension
\r
26679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26690 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
\r
26691 The format is explained in
\r
26692 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26693 LatexCommand cite
\r
26698 and in the LaTeX books (
\r
26699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26700 LatexCommand cite
\r
26701 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
\r
26706 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
\r
26707 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
\r
26708 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
\r
26709 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26714 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
\r
26722 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26723 To use a database, use the menu
\r
26725 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26730 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26743 \begin_inset space ~
\r
26749 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
\r
26750 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
\r
26757 Add bibliography to TOC
\r
26759 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
\r
26764 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
\r
26765 in the document or just the cited references.
\r
26768 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26769 The style file is a text file with the file extension
\r
26770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
26781 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
\r
26782 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
\r
26783 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
\r
26785 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
\r
26787 \begin_inset Foot
\r
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26791 For information on how this is done, have a look at
\r
26792 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
26796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
26797 LatexCommand href
\r
26798 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
\r
26810 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26811 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
\r
26814 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26815 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
\r
26816 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
\r
26822 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26823 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26828 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26829 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26830 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26845 The following variants are possible:
\r
26848 \begin_layout Description
\r
26849 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
\r
26850 with other bibliography packages (e.
\r
26851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
26855 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
26862 ), only with the package
\r
26866 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
\r
26870 \begin_layout Description
\r
26871 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
\r
26872 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
\r
26873 with all bibliography packages, except
\r
26878 \begin_layout Description
\r
26879 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
\r
26880 larger memory than
\r
26884 , works with all bibliography packages
\r
26887 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26888 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
\r
26890 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
\r
26896 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
26897 LatexCommand cite
\r
26905 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26906 When you select the option
\r
26908 Sectioned bibliography
\r
26912 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26913 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26916 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
\r
26917 This and other options are explained in detail in section
\r
26919 Customizing Bibliographies
\r
26927 Additional Features
\r
26932 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26933 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
\r
26934 the two methods of creating them.
\r
26935 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
\r
26936 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
\r
26937 We used the style file
\r
26941 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
\r
26944 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
26945 Bibliography layout
\r
26946 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26950 Bibliography ! Layout
\r
26958 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26959 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
\r
26960 For this feature you need to enable the option
\r
26966 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
26970 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
26973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
26974 Document ! Settings
\r
26984 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
\r
26985 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
\r
26986 in the previous section.
\r
26989 \begin_layout Standard
\r
26990 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
\r
26991 the citation reference window.
\r
26992 Here is an example where the text
\r
26993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
26997 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27004 appears after the reference:
\r
27007 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27009 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27010 LatexCommand cite
\r
27011 after "Chapter 3"
\r
27012 key "latexcompanion"
\r
27019 \begin_layout Section
\r
27021 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
27032 LatexCommand label
\r
27040 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27041 An index entry is created if you use the menu
\r
27043 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27045 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27050 or the toolbar button
\r
27051 \begin_inset Info
\r
27053 arg "index-insert"
\r
27057 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
\r
27058 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
\r
27059 by LyX as the index entry.
\r
27062 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27063 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
\r
27065 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27066 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27074 A light blue box labeled
\r
27075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27086 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
\r
27087 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
\r
27090 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27091 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
\r
27092 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
\r
27093 of the LaTeX books
\r
27094 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27095 LatexCommand cite
\r
27096 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
\r
27103 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27104 Grouping Index Entries
\r
27105 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27117 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27118 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
\r
27120 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
\r
27121 lists under the entry
\r
27122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27130 First we create the entry
\r
27131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27139 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27145 reference "sub:Lists"
\r
27150 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
\r
27151 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27157 reference "sec:Itemize"
\r
27161 , we insert the command
\r
27164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27170 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27177 Lists ! Enumerate
\r
27180 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27181 for the enumerated list in section
\r
27182 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27188 reference "sec:Enumerate"
\r
27195 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27196 The exclamation mark
\r
27197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27204 marks the grouping levels.
\r
27205 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
\r
27206 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
\r
27207 If we don't have an index entry for
\r
27208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27215 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
\r
27218 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27220 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27224 Index ! Page ranges
\r
27232 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27233 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
\r
27235 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
\r
27236 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
\r
27237 an index entry in section
\r
27238 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27244 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
\r
27251 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27254 Paragraph environments|(
\r
27257 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27258 and another entry at the end of section
\r
27259 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27265 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
\r
27272 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27275 Paragraph environments|)
\r
27278 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27303 respectively start and end the index range.
\r
27304 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
\r
27305 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
\r
27306 the pages of the indexed document parts.
\r
27307 An example is the index entry
\r
27308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27311 Document ! Settings
\r
27312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27318 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27319 Cross referencing
\r
27320 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27324 Index ! Cross referencing
\r
27332 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27333 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
\r
27334 We referred for example in the index entry
\r
27335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27343 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27349 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
\r
27353 ) to the index entry
\r
27354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27361 in the same section using the entry
\r
27364 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27367 GIF|see{Image formats}
\r
27370 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27371 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
\r
27372 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
\r
27373 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
\r
27376 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27377 Index Entry Order
\r
27378 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27382 Index ! Entry order
\r
27390 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27391 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
\r
27392 follow the rules for the index order.
\r
27393 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
\r
27394 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27398 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
\r
27400 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27406 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27415 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
\r
27416 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
\r
27417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27441 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27445 Dummy entries ! maïs
\r
27451 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27455 Dummy entries ! maître
\r
27461 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27465 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
\r
27470 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
\r
27471 maïs, maison, maître.
\r
27472 To achieve this, we use the command
\r
27475 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27478 previous entry@current entry
\r
27481 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27482 In our case we want to have
\r
27483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27498 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
\r
27501 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27507 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27508 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
\r
27509 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
\r
27510 See the next subsection for an example.
\r
27513 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27514 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
27520 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27521 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
\r
27526 to generate the index (see sec.
\r
27527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27533 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27542 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
\r
27544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27550 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
27554 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
\r
27555 index commands start with
\r
27556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27568 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
\r
27573 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
\r
27576 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27588 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27600 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27601 Index Entry Layout
\r
27602 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27606 Index ! Entry layout
\r
27614 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27615 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
\r
27616 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27622 This is an italic dummy entry
\r
27627 You can also format the page number using the character
\r
27628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27635 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
\r
27636 We can write for example
\r
27639 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27642 italic page number:|textit
\r
27645 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27646 to get the page number in italic.
\r
27647 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27651 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
\r
27656 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
\r
27658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27674 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27680 Have a look at section
\r
27681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27687 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
27691 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
\r
27694 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27695 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
27698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27703 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
\r
27707 to generate the index, see sec.
\r
27708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27714 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27723 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
\r
27728 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
\r
27729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27730 LatexCommand cite
\r
27731 after "p. 678 ff."
\r
27732 key "latexcompanion"
\r
27744 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27745 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
\r
27747 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
\r
27748 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
\r
27749 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
\r
27750 If so, put the following in the preamble
\r
27753 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27765 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27769 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27772 my entry|IndexDef
\r
27775 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27776 in the index entry.
\r
27777 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27781 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
\r
27786 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
\r
27787 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
\r
27788 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
\r
27791 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27792 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
\r
27793 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
\r
27794 a bold font for all index entries.
\r
27795 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
\r
27807 documentation for details,
\r
27808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27809 LatexCommand cite
\r
27810 key "makeindex,xindy"
\r
27817 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27819 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
27830 LatexCommand label
\r
27831 name "sub:Index-Program"
\r
27838 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27839 If the index generation program
\r
27843 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
\r
27847 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
\r
27848 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27856 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
\r
27857 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
\r
27858 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
\r
27859 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
\r
27860 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
\r
27870 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
\r
27871 dialog, see section
\r
27872 \begin_inset space ~
\r
27876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
27878 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
27883 The available options are listed and explained in
\r
27884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27885 LatexCommand cite
\r
27886 key "makeindex,xindy"
\r
27891 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
\r
27895 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27896 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
\r
27897 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
27898 or the options in
\r
27900 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27901 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27905 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
\r
27906 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
\r
27909 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
27913 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27914 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
\r
27915 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
\r
27916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27923 next to the standard index.
\r
27924 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
\r
27925 that add this feature.
\r
27931 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
27934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27935 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
\r
27940 package to generate multiple indexes.
\r
27941 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
\r
27942 \begin_inset Foot
\r
27945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
27946 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
\r
27947 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
27948 LatexCommand cite
\r
27949 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
27954 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
\r
27955 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
\r
27956 Please consult the package's manual for details.
\r
27964 \begin_layout Standard
\r
27965 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
\r
27967 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27968 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
27971 and select the option
\r
27973 Use multiple Indexes
\r
27976 Note that the list
\r
27978 Available Indexes
\r
27980 already contains the standard index
\r
27981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
27985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
27989 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
\r
27990 also appear as a heading) to the
\r
27994 input field and press the
\r
27999 The new index now also appears in the list.
\r
28000 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
\r
28004 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28005 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
\r
28008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28015 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
\r
28016 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
\r
28017 are additional features:
\r
28020 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
28021 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
\r
28022 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
\r
28025 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
28026 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
\r
28027 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
\r
28028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28035 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
\r
28036 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
\r
28037 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
\r
28038 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
\r
28041 \begin_layout Section
\r
28042 Nomenclature/Glossary
\r
28043 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28053 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28086 LatexCommand label
\r
28087 name "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
28094 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28095 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
\r
28096 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
\r
28097 called nomenclature or glossary.
\r
28100 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28101 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
\r
28107 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28111 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
\r
28117 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
\r
28118 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28119 LatexCommand cite
\r
28120 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
28124 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
28127 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28128 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
\r
28129 and then use the menu
\r
28131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28137 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28142 or the toolbar button
\r
28143 \begin_inset Info
\r
28145 arg "nomencl-insert"
\r
28149 A gray box labeled
\r
28150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28161 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
\r
28164 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28165 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
\r
28166 The first is the term or
\r
28170 that you wish to define.
\r
28171 The second is the
\r
28175 of the term or symbol.
\r
28178 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28179 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
28182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28187 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
\r
28195 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28196 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
\r
28197 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28201 Nomenclature ! Layout
\r
28209 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28210 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
\r
28214 field as LaTeX-formulas.
\r
28215 For example to get
\r
28216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28220 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28228 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28236 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28249 character starts/ends the formula.
\r
28250 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
\r
28251 with a backslash
\r
28252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28262 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
\r
28272 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28273 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
28274 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
28280 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
28287 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28288 You cannot use the
\r
28291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28296 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
\r
28297 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
\r
28298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28302 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28309 in this document is:
\r
28310 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28315 dummy entry for the character
\r
28320 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28329 sets the fonts to
\r
28332 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28342 font use the command
\r
28349 \family typewriter
\r
28371 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28372 If the characters |
\r
28373 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28377 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28381 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28385 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28389 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
28392 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
\r
28393 a quote character in front of them.
\r
28394 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28395 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28396 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
\r
28397 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
\r
28404 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28405 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
\r
28406 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28410 Nomenclature ! Sort order
\r
28418 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28419 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
\r
28420 the symbol definition.
\r
28421 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
\r
28423 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
\r
28426 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28427 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28429 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
\r
28436 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28440 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
\r
28441 LatexCommand nomenclature
\r
28443 symbol "$\\sigma$"
\r
28444 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
\r
28449 They will be sorted by
\r
28450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28466 \family typewriter
\r
28472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28476 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28479 will be sorted before the
\r
28483 since the character
\r
28484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28491 is considered in sorting.
\r
28494 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28495 To control the sort order, you can edit the
\r
28498 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28503 field of the nomenclature dialog.
\r
28504 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
\r
28506 For the example given, you can insert
\r
28507 \family typewriter
\r
28510 in this field for the
\r
28511 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28518 will be located before
\r
28519 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
\r
28525 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28526 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
\r
28531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28532 LatexCommand cite
\r
28540 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28541 Nomenclature Options
\r
28542 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28546 Nomenclature ! Options
\r
28554 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28559 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
\r
28560 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
\r
28563 \begin_layout Description
\r
28564 refeq Appends the phrase
\r
28565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28580 to every nomenclature entry, where
\r
28586 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
\r
28589 \begin_layout Description
\r
28590 refpage Appends the phrase
\r
28591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28606 to every nomenclature entry, where
\r
28612 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
\r
28615 \begin_layout Description
\r
28616 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
\r
28619 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28620 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
\r
28621 class options list in the
\r
28623 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28627 In this document the options
\r
28634 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28635 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
28641 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28642 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
\r
28643 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
\r
28648 field in the nomenclature dialog:
\r
28651 \begin_layout Description
\r
28654 nomrefeq Like the
\r
28661 \begin_layout Description
\r
28664 nomrefpage Like the
\r
28671 \begin_layout Description
\r
28674 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
\r
28683 \begin_layout Description
\r
28687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28693 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28698 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
\r
28701 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28710 are automatically translated for some document languages.
\r
28711 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
\r
28714 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28722 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
\r
28724 nobreakspace(#1)}
\r
28725 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28732 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
\r
28734 nobreakspace{}#1}
\r
28737 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
28741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28756 by their translation.
\r
28759 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28760 Printing the Nomenclature
\r
28761 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28765 Nomenclature ! Printing
\r
28773 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28774 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
\r
28776 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28777 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28793 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
\r
28794 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
\r
28795 You can choose between these settings:
\r
28798 \begin_layout Description
\r
28799 Default a space of 1
\r
28800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
28806 \begin_layout Description
\r
28808 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28812 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28815 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
\r
28818 \begin_layout Description
\r
28819 Custom custom space
\r
28822 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28823 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
\r
28824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28832 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
\r
28840 For example, in order to change the name to
\r
28844 , add the following line to the preamble:
\r
28847 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28855 nomname}{List of Symbols}
\r
28858 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
28859 Nomenclature Program
\r
28860 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28864 Nomenclature ! Program
\r
28870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28871 LatexCommand label
\r
28872 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
\r
28879 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28880 LyX uses the program
\r
28884 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
\r
28885 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
\r
28890 by adding options, see section
\r
28891 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
28897 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
28902 The available options are listed and explained in
\r
28903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
28904 LatexCommand cite
\r
28905 key "nomencl,makeindex"
\r
28912 \begin_layout Section
\r
28914 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28924 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
28928 Document ! Branches
\r
28934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
28935 LatexCommand label
\r
28936 name "sec:Branches"
\r
28943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28944 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
\r
28945 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
\r
28946 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
\r
28947 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
\r
28950 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28951 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
\r
28952 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
\r
28953 To create a branch, either select the menu
\r
28955 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28956 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28957 Insert New Branch
\r
28959 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
\r
28961 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
28968 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
\r
28969 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
\r
28970 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
\r
28971 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
\r
28972 (see below for an example).
\r
28973 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
\r
28974 to the name of the other) and to add
\r
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
28979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
28983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
28987 \begin_inset space ~
\r
28990 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
\r
28991 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
\r
28994 \begin_layout Standard
\r
28995 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
\r
28996 These boxes are inserted via the menu
\r
28998 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29001 where you can choose a branch.
\r
29002 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
\r
29006 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29007 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
\r
29008 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
\r
29011 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29012 \begin_inset Branch Question
\r
29015 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29016 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
\r
29024 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29025 \begin_inset Branch Answer
\r
29028 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29029 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
\r
29037 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29044 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29045 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29048 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
\r
29049 Consider for example a file
\r
29050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29057 which has the above branches.
\r
29059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29066 is active, the PDF export file would be called
\r
29067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29090 branch were inactive,
\r
29091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29094 Exam-Question.pdf
\r
29095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29106 branch was active, likewise
\r
29107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29122 branch was active, and
\r
29123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29126 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
\r
29127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29130 if both branches were active.
\r
29131 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
\r
29134 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29135 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
29141 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29142 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
\r
29143 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
\r
29145 For example you can define for the question branch
\r
29146 \begin_inset Foot
\r
29149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29150 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
\r
29151 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
29157 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
29169 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29179 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29189 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29190 and for the answer branch
\r
29193 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29203 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29213 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29214 \begin_inset Branch Question
\r
29217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29249 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29250 \begin_inset Branch Answer
\r
29253 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29285 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29286 Now it is possible to use the
\r
29290 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
29297 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
29300 commands to obtain conditional output.
\r
29301 Here is an example formula where only the
\r
29308 \begin_inset Formula
\r
29310 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
\r
29318 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29319 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
\r
29327 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29328 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
\r
29330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
29334 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
29337 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
\r
29338 For this advanced usage, see the
\r
29343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29346 Flex insets and InsetLayout
\r
29347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29353 \begin_layout Section
\r
29355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29356 LatexCommand label
\r
29357 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
29362 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29374 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29377 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29378 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29381 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
\r
29383 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
\r
29388 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29392 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
29397 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
\r
29398 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
\r
29399 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
\r
29400 part of the document.
\r
29404 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29405 The header information in the dialog tab
\r
29409 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
\r
29410 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
\r
29411 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
\r
29412 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
\r
29416 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29420 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29425 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
\r
29426 title and author entries.
\r
29430 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29434 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29438 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29443 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
\r
29446 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29447 You can specify in the dialog tab
\r
29451 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
\r
29456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29460 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29464 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29469 option allows long links to be split;
\r
29472 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29476 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29480 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29488 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29493 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
\r
29496 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29501 colors the different links.
\r
29502 The default colors are:
\r
29505 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29511 for hyperlinks and URLs
\r
29514 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29523 \begin_layout Labeling
\r
29524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\r
29532 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29533 but you can change these in the field
\r
29535 Additional options
\r
29538 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
\r
29541 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29544 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
\r
29547 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29552 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
\r
29553 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
\r
29554 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
\r
29557 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29558 In the dialog tab
\r
29562 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
\r
29563 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
\r
29564 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
\r
29574 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
\r
29575 when opening the PDF.
\r
29576 For example level
\r
29577 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29580 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
\r
29581 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29584 1 will only display the sections.
\r
29587 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29588 PDF properties are also used in this document.
\r
29589 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
\r
29594 options are used.
\r
29595 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
\r
29596 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29597 LatexCommand cite
\r
29605 \begin_layout Section
\r
29606 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
\r
29607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29608 LatexCommand label
\r
29609 name "sec:TeX-Code"
\r
29616 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
29618 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29629 LatexCommand label
\r
29630 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
\r
29637 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29638 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
\r
29639 constructs, but not all.
\r
29640 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
\r
29641 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
\r
29642 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
\r
29643 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
\r
29644 and their commands.
\r
29647 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29648 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
\r
29650 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
\r
29652 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29665 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29670 or by the toolbar button
\r
29671 \begin_inset Info
\r
29677 \begin_inset Info
\r
29683 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
\r
29684 it and selecting
\r
29691 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29692 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
\r
29693 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
\r
29694 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
\r
29695 using the LaTeX-command
\r
29701 , you can write the command part
\r
29707 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
\r
29711 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
\r
29712 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
\r
29713 the following example:
\r
29716 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29717 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
29718 filename clipart/ERT.png
\r
29726 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29730 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29731 This is a line with a
\r
29735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29758 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29759 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
29762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29767 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
\r
29768 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
\r
29776 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
29777 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
\r
29778 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
29781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29788 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
29799 LatexCommand label
\r
29800 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
29807 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29808 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
\r
29809 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
\r
29810 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
\r
29811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
29815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
29819 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
\r
29820 any time if you know the right commands.
\r
29821 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
\r
29822 is the end of the day.
\r
29823 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
\r
29824 all caption labels bold.
\r
29825 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
\r
29827 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
\r
29831 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29832 Now LaTeX comes into play.
\r
29833 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
\r
29834 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
\r
29836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29837 LatexCommand cite
\r
29845 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29846 As result you find that the package
\r
29851 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
29854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29855 LaTeX-packages ! caption
\r
29860 is what you need.
\r
29861 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
\r
29863 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29866 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
29873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29881 \begin_inset space ~
\r
29886 ) with the command
\r
29889 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29894 usepackage[options]{package name}
\r
29897 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29898 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
\r
29899 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
\r
29900 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
\r
29903 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29904 In your case the package name is
\r
29909 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
\r
29914 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
\r
29915 So you add the command
\r
29918 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29923 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
\r
29926 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29927 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
\r
29928 \begin_inset Foot
\r
29931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
29932 For more commands provided by the
\r
29936 package, have a look at its documentation,
\r
29937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
29938 LatexCommand cite
\r
29951 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29952 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
\r
29954 For example if you use a
\r
29958 class, you don't need the package
\r
29962 , you can instead write
\r
29965 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29970 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
\r
29975 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29976 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
\r
29977 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
\r
29978 documentation of the document class you want to use.
\r
29985 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
\r
29988 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29989 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
\r
29990 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
\r
29992 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
\r
29993 the previous section.
\r
29996 \begin_layout Standard
\r
29997 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
\r
29999 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30000 LatexCommand cite
\r
30001 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
\r
30008 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30009 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
\r
30015 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30029 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30033 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
\r
30041 \begin_layout Left Header
\r
30042 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30065 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
30068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30069 defines the header line as described below
\r
30077 \begin_layout Center Header
\r
30078 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30090 \begin_layout Right Header
\r
30091 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30115 \begin_layout Left Footer
\r
30116 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30140 \begin_layout Center Footer
\r
30141 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30155 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
30159 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
\r
30165 \begin_layout Right Footer
\r
30166 \begin_inset Argument 1
\r
30169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30191 \begin_layout Section
\r
30192 Customized Page Headers and Footers
\r
30193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
30194 LatexCommand label
\r
30195 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
\r
30200 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30204 Document ! Header/Footer line
\r
30210 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30214 Header/Footer line
\r
30222 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30223 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
\r
30227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30238 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30244 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30250 As a second step add in the menu
\r
30252 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30253 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30260 Custom Header/Footerlines
\r
30261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
30265 This module offers the following 6
\r
30266 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30272 \begin_layout Description
\r
30274 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30278 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30282 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30286 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30290 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30296 \begin_layout Description
\r
30298 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30302 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30306 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30310 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30314 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30320 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30321 for the different positions in the header/footer.
\r
30324 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30325 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
\r
30326 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
\r
30328 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
30334 reference "fig:Page-layout"
\r
30338 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
\r
30341 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30342 \begin_inset Float figure
\r
30348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30351 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
30352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
\r
30353 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
30354 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30356 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
\r
30358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30359 \begin_inset Text
\r
30361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30368 \begin_inset Text
\r
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30376 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30377 \begin_inset Text
\r
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30388 \begin_inset Text
\r
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30397 \begin_inset Text
\r
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30405 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30406 \begin_inset Text
\r
30408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30416 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
\r
30417 \begin_inset Text
\r
30419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30420 The normal text on the page goes here.
\r
30421 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
\r
30423 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
\r
30424 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
\r
30429 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30430 \begin_inset Text
\r
30432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30438 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30439 \begin_inset Text
\r
30441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30450 \begin_inset Text
\r
30452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
30459 \begin_inset Text
\r
30461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30467 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30468 \begin_inset Text
\r
30470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30479 \begin_inset Text
\r
30481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30488 \begin_inset Text
\r
30490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30496 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
30497 \begin_inset Text
\r
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30514 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
30516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
30518 LatexCommand label
\r
30519 name "fig:Page-layout"
\r
30523 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
\r
30536 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
30540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30545 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
\r
30549 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30554 is set to “Default”.
\r
30555 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
\r
30564 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30568 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30569 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
\r
30570 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
\r
30571 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
\r
30572 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
\r
30574 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
\r
30575 Defining the footer line works similarly.
\r
30578 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30579 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
\r
30580 as TeX code (menu
\r
30582 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30595 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30603 \begin_layout Description
\r
30606 thepage prints the current page number
\r
30609 \begin_layout Description
\r
30612 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
\r
30615 \begin_layout Description
\r
30618 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
\r
30621 \begin_layout Description
\r
30624 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
\r
30625 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
\r
30628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30632 \begin_inset Quotes prd
\r
30635 because it usually goes in a left header.
\r
30638 \begin_layout Description
\r
30641 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
\r
30642 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
\r
30644 It is normally used in the right header.
\r
30647 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30648 Default header/footer
\r
30651 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30652 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
\r
30653 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
\r
30654 footer has the page number.
\r
30655 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
\r
30656 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
\r
30657 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
\r
30660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30668 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30672 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30673 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
\r
30674 Some pages are different.
\r
30675 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
\r
30676 a new part or chapter in your book.
\r
30677 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
\r
30678 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
\r
30679 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
\r
30682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
30683 Header and footer decoration line
\r
30686 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30687 By default, you get a 0.4
\r
30688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30691 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
\r
30692 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
\r
30704 in the following way:
\r
30707 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30714 headrulewidth}{thickness}
\r
30717 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30718 where thickness is a size in standard units like
\r
30727 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
\r
30728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30734 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30735 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
\r
30736 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
\r
30737 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30742 LatexCommand cite
\r
30750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
30751 Several header/footer lines
\r
30754 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30755 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
\r
30756 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
\r
30757 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
\r
30759 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
\r
30771 in this entry in
\r
30773 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30774 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30787 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30795 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30802 headheight}{height}
\r
30805 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30806 where height is a size in standard units.
\r
30807 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
\r
30808 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
\r
30809 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
\r
30811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
30816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30825 and use the button
\r
30828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30833 to see if you can find a warning about the package
\r
30838 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
30841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
30842 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
30848 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
\r
30849 for your header/footer.
\r
30852 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
30856 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30857 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
\r
30858 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
\r
30859 This example consists of the following definition:
\r
30862 \begin_layout Description
\r
30864 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30873 , empty optional argument
\r
30876 \begin_layout Description
\r
30878 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30881 Header empty, empty optional argument
\r
30884 \begin_layout Description
\r
30886 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30895 in the optional argument
\r
30898 \begin_layout Description
\r
30900 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30909 in the optional argument
\r
30912 \begin_layout Description
\r
30914 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
30930 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
30934 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
\r
30938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
30941 in the optional argument
\r
30944 \begin_layout Description
\r
30946 \begin_inset space ~
\r
30955 , empty optional argument
\r
30958 \begin_layout Description
\r
30961 headrulewidth set to 2
\r
30962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
30968 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30969 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
\r
30970 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
\r
30976 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
30977 LatexCommand cite
\r
30985 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30986 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
\r
30992 \begin_layout Standard
\r
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31000 pagestyle{headings}
\r
31006 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31010 switches back to page style with the default headings
\r
31018 \begin_layout Section
\r
31019 Previewing Snippets of your Document
\r
31020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
31021 LatexCommand label
\r
31022 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
31027 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31037 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31041 Document ! Preview
\r
31049 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31050 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
\r
31051 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
\r
31052 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
\r
31055 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31059 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31060 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
\r
31065 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31069 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
\r
31074 (on some systems named simply
\r
31079 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
\r
31081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
31082 LatexCommand cite
\r
31083 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
31087 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
31088 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
\r
31089 \family typewriter
\r
31093 \family typewriter
\r
31096 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
\r
31097 automatically installed together with LyX.
\r
31100 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31101 Enabling previews
\r
31104 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31105 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
\r
31106 LaTeX, activate the option
\r
31109 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31116 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31122 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31126 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31129 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31136 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31149 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31154 is the multiplication factor for the size.
\r
31157 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31158 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
\r
31162 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31170 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31178 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31179 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
\r
31180 editing an inset.
\r
31183 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31184 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
31187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31192 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
\r
31193 generated by activating the option
\r
31196 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31202 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
\r
31210 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31211 Selected document parts
\r
31214 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31215 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
\r
31216 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
\r
31217 that are not yet supported by LyX.
\r
31218 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
\r
31220 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31224 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
\r
31225 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
\r
31226 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
\r
31229 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31230 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
\r
31236 which is not yet supported by LyX.
\r
31237 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31247 is explained in section
\r
31249 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
\r
31254 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31264 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
\r
31265 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
\r
31267 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
\r
31269 Here is the result:
\r
31272 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31273 \begin_inset Preview
\r
31275 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31284 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
\r
31290 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
\r
31300 height_special "totalheight"
\r
31303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31328 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
\r
31334 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
\r
31341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31356 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31357 Previewing works also for colors.
\r
31358 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
\r
31366 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31376 is explained in section
\r
31383 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31396 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31397 \begin_inset Preview
\r
31399 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31422 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
\r
31427 This is text within a colored, framed box.
\r
31431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31446 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31447 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
31453 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31454 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
\r
31455 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
\r
31456 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
\r
31458 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
\r
31459 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
\r
31460 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
\r
31461 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
\r
31465 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31466 LaTeX source code
\r
31469 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31470 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
\r
31473 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31475 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31480 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
\r
31481 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
\r
31483 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
\r
31484 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
\r
31485 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
\r
31486 the source view window.
\r
31491 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
\r
31492 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
\r
31493 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
\r
31496 \begin_layout Section
\r
31497 Advanced Find and Replace
\r
31498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
31499 LatexCommand label
\r
31500 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
31505 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31515 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
31518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31527 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31531 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31532 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
\r
31533 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
\r
31534 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
\r
31535 The key-features are:
\r
31538 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31539 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
\r
31540 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
\r
31541 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
\r
31545 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31546 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
\r
31547 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
\r
31548 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
\r
31549 a section heading will only be found within section headings
\r
31552 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31553 Search may be widened to a specific
\r
31558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31562 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31565 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
\r
31566 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
\r
31573 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31574 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
\r
31575 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
\r
31576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31580 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31583 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
\r
31586 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31590 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31591 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
\r
31593 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31604 \begin_inset Info
\r
31606 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
\r
31609 ) or the toolbar button
\r
31610 \begin_inset Info
\r
31612 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
\r
31618 Advanced Find and Replace
\r
31623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31624 Searching for text
\r
31627 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31632 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
\r
31636 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31641 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
\r
31642 \begin_inset Info
\r
31644 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31648 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
\r
31649 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
\r
31651 \begin_inset Info
\r
31653 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31656 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
\r
31660 searches backwards.
\r
31663 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31667 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31672 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
\r
31681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31686 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
\r
31689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31690 Searching for mathematics
\r
31693 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31694 Mathematical formulas, such as
\r
31695 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
\r
31698 or something more complex like
\r
31699 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
\r
31702 , may be searched for by typing them in the
\r
31707 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
\r
31708 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
\r
31709 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
\r
31710 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
\r
31716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31717 Style-aware search
\r
31720 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31721 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
\r
31722 This is done by switching to the
\r
31726 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
\r
31731 This way, entering in the
\r
31738 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31739 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
\r
31740 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
\r
31743 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31744 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
\r
31745 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
\r
31748 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31749 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
\r
31750 of it only within section headings.
\r
31751 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
\r
31752 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
\r
31756 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31757 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
\r
31758 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
\r
31761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
31765 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31766 The entries made in the
\r
31770 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
\r
31773 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31779 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
\r
31783 button or alternatively press
\r
31784 \begin_inset Info
\r
31786 arg "break-paragraph"
\r
31793 while the cursor is in the
\r
31796 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31804 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31805 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
\r
31806 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
\r
31810 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31811 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
\r
31812 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
\r
31813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31820 with its typewriter version
\r
31821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31825 \family typewriter
\r
31829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31835 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
31836 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
\r
31838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31842 \begin_inset Formula $R$
\r
31846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
\r
31858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31861 (you may want to enable the
\r
31864 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31872 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31877 options and disable the
\r
31885 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
\r
31886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
31890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
31893 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
\r
31894 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
\r
31898 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
\r
31901 , or occurrences of
\r
31902 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
\r
31906 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
\r
31912 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
31916 \begin_layout Standard
\r
31917 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
\r
31918 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31922 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
\r
31924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
31925 LatexCommand href
\r
31926 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
\r
31935 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
\r
31941 This is done with the context menu
\r
31943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
31944 Insert Regular Expression
\r
31946 while the cursor is in the
\r
31951 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
\r
31952 expression matching rules
\r
31953 \begin_inset Foot
\r
31956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
31957 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
\r
31959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
31963 \begin_inset space ~
\r
31966 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
\r
31967 to match expressions.
\r
31972 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
\r
31973 same text in the document.
\r
31974 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
\r
31975 Examples of using such a feature may be:
\r
31978 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
31979 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
\r
31984 editor the fraction
\r
31985 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
\r
31989 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
31992 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
\r
31993 fractions with the given denominator.
\r
31996 \begin_layout Enumerate
\r
31997 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
\r
32009 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
32014 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
\r
32015 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
\r
32016 Also, by inserting a
\r
32017 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
\r
32020 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
\r
32021 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
\r
32024 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32025 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
\r
32026 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
\r
32027 \begin_inset Formula $()$
\r
32030 , and referring back to them through
\r
32031 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
\r
32035 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
\r
32039 For example, try searching with the regexp
\r
32040 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32043 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
\r
32046 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32049 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
\r
32052 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32053 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
\r
32056 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32057 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
32060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32065 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
\r
32066 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
\r
32067 sub-expressions is absolute.
\r
32069 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32073 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
\r
32076 always refers to the first occurrence of
\r
32077 \begin_inset Formula $()$
\r
32080 in all entered regexps.
\r
32088 \begin_layout Section
\r
32090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32091 LatexCommand label
\r
32092 name "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
32097 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32109 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32110 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
\r
32113 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32120 key or the toolbar button
\r
32121 \begin_inset Info
\r
32123 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
\r
32126 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
\r
32127 beginning of the currently selected text.
\r
32128 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
\r
32129 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
\r
32130 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
\r
32131 scrolled so that it is visible.
\r
32132 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
\r
32133 n, if any could be found.
\r
32134 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
\r
32138 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
\r
32139 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
\r
32142 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32143 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
\r
32144 that is set in the
\r
32146 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32150 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
\r
32151 a different one at the top of the dialog.
\r
32152 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
\r
32153 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
\r
32156 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32162 \begin_inset Info
\r
32164 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
32167 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
\r
32168 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
\r
32171 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32172 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
\r
32173 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32177 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
32180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32182 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
\r
32188 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32192 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32195 files for each language.
\r
32196 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
\r
32197 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32200 files into LyX's installation subfolder
\r
32211 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32215 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32218 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32219 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32221 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32224 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32227 you can set the following things:
\r
32230 \begin_layout Description
\r
32232 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32235 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
\r
32236 Depending on your platform,
\r
32237 \family typewriter
\r
32241 \family typewriter
\r
32245 \family typewriter
\r
32247 \begin_inset Foot
\r
32250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32251 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
\r
32252 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
\r
32261 \family typewriter
\r
32267 \begin_layout Description
\r
32269 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32272 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
\r
32273 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
\r
32276 \begin_layout Description
\r
32278 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32281 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
\r
32282 should escape, e.
\r
32283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32287 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32291 This should normally not be needed.
\r
32294 \begin_layout Description
\r
32296 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32300 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32303 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
\r
32305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
32309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
32315 \begin_layout Description
\r
32317 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32320 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
\r
32321 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
\r
32322 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
\r
32323 appear in a context menu.
\r
32324 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
\r
32328 \begin_layout Description
\r
32330 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32334 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32338 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32341 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
\r
32345 \begin_layout Section
\r
32347 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32358 LatexCommand label
\r
32359 name "sec:Thesaurus"
\r
32366 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32367 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
\r
32368 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
\r
32370 \family typewriter
\r
32374 \begin_inset Foot
\r
32377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
32379 LatexCommand href
\r
32380 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
\r
32389 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
\r
32390 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
\r
32391 are available for many languages.
\r
32394 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32395 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
\r
32396 the use with LyX.
\r
32399 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32400 Setting up the thesaurus
\r
32403 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32405 \family typewriter
\r
32411 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
\r
32416 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
\r
32421 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
\r
32423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32427 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32435 For instance, the US English files are named:
\r
32438 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
32442 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
32446 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32447 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux
\r
32448 system, these files should be already on your system.
\r
32449 On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be
\r
32453 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32454 All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
\r
32455 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32459 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
32462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32464 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
\r
32470 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
32473 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
\r
32474 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32477 files into LyX's installation subfolder
\r
32488 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
32489 Using the thesaurus
\r
32492 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32493 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
\r
32495 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32498 or the toolbar button
\r
32499 \begin_inset Info
\r
32501 arg "thesaurus-entry"
\r
32504 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
\r
32506 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
\r
32508 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
\r
32509 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
\r
32510 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
\r
32519 ), related terms (such as
\r
32522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32531 ), compounds (such as
\r
32534 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32539 , if you look for
\r
32543 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
\r
32552 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
\r
32555 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32556 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
\r
32557 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
\r
32558 up directly there.
\r
32561 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32562 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
\r
32563 the dictionary, such as the above
\r
32567 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
\r
32568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32572 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32575 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
\r
32576 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
\r
32577 For example, looking up the word form
\r
32581 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
\r
32586 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
\r
32587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
32591 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
32602 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
\r
32603 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
\r
32604 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
\r
32607 \begin_layout Section
\r
32609 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32619 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32623 Document ! Change Tracking
\r
32629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
32630 LatexCommand label
\r
32631 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
32638 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32639 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
\r
32640 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
\r
32641 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
\r
32642 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
\r
32644 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32646 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32649 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32659 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32660 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
\r
32671 \strikeout default
\r
32674 The color depends on the author that made the change.
\r
32675 You can change the color in
\r
32677 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32678 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32680 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32684 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32689 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32695 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32699 Color ! Change tracking
\r
32704 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
\r
32705 the cursor is in changed text.
\r
32706 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
\r
32707 \begin_inset Info
\r
32709 arg "changes-merge"
\r
32715 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32716 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
\r
32717 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32729 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32730 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32736 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32737 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
32738 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
\r
32746 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32747 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32753 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32754 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
\r
32757 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32758 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
32764 \begin_layout Standard
\r
32765 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
32766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
\r
32767 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
32768 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
32769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
32770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32772 \begin_inset Text
\r
32774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32777 \begin_inset Info
\r
32779 arg "changes-track"
\r
32787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32788 \begin_inset Text
\r
32790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32793 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32795 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32798 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32800 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32811 \begin_inset Text
\r
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32816 \begin_inset Info
\r
32818 arg "changes-output"
\r
32826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32827 \begin_inset Text
\r
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32832 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32834 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32837 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32839 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32843 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32847 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32858 \begin_inset Text
\r
32860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32863 \begin_inset Info
\r
32865 arg "change-next"
\r
32873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32874 \begin_inset Text
\r
32876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32877 Jumps to the next change
\r
32883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32885 \begin_inset Text
\r
32887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32890 \begin_inset Info
\r
32892 arg "change-accept"
\r
32900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32901 \begin_inset Text
\r
32903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32906 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32908 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32911 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32913 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32924 \begin_inset Text
\r
32926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32929 \begin_inset Info
\r
32931 arg "change-reject"
\r
32939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32940 \begin_inset Text
\r
32942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32945 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32947 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32950 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32952 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
32962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32963 \begin_inset Text
\r
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32968 \begin_inset Info
\r
32970 arg "changes-merge"
\r
32978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
32979 \begin_inset Text
\r
32981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
32984 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32986 \begin_inset space ~
\r
32989 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
32991 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33002 \begin_inset Text
\r
33004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33007 \begin_inset Info
\r
33009 arg "all-changes-accept"
\r
33017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33018 \begin_inset Text
\r
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33023 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33025 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33028 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33030 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33034 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33045 \begin_inset Text
\r
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33050 \begin_inset Info
\r
33052 arg "all-changes-reject"
\r
33060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33061 \begin_inset Text
\r
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33066 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33071 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33073 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33077 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33088 \begin_inset Text
\r
33090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33093 \begin_inset Info
\r
33095 arg "note-insert"
\r
33103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33104 \begin_inset Text
\r
33106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33109 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33110 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33123 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
33133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33134 \begin_inset Text
\r
33136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33139 \begin_inset Info
\r
33149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
33150 \begin_inset Text
\r
33152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33155 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33157 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33173 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33174 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
33180 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33181 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
\r
33201 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33202 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
\r
33203 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
\r
33204 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
\r
33205 the next change after the current cursor position.
\r
33206 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
\r
33207 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
\r
33208 step to the next change.
\r
33209 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
\r
33212 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33213 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
\r
33214 to describe a change.
\r
33217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33218 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
\r
33223 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33227 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
\r
33233 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
\r
33234 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
33235 LatexCommand cite
\r
33236 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
33240 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
\r
33243 \begin_layout Section
\r
33244 Comparison of Documents
\r
33245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33246 LatexCommand label
\r
33247 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
\r
33252 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33256 Comparison of documents
\r
33264 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33265 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
\r
33267 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33271 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
\r
33273 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
\r
33274 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
\r
33278 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33282 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33286 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33295 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33303 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33307 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33311 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33315 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33320 enables the change tracking option
\r
33323 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33327 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33331 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33336 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
\r
33339 \begin_layout Section
\r
33340 International Support
\r
33341 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33345 International support
\r
33353 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33354 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
\r
33355 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
\r
33356 up LyX to use them:
\r
33357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
33358 LatexCommand cite
\r
33359 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
\r
33366 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33367 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
\r
33368 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33374 reference "sub:Special-Character"
\r
33381 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33383 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33387 Language ! Options
\r
33393 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33397 Document ! Settings
\r
33403 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33407 Document ! Language
\r
33415 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33418 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33419 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33422 dialog lets you set
\r
33424 the language, the quote style and character encoding
\r
33429 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33434 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
\r
33438 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33443 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
\r
33444 For details about the different encoding options see section
\r
33445 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33451 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
33458 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33459 Keyboard mapping configuration
\r
33460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33461 LatexCommand label
\r
33462 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
\r
33469 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33470 If you have for example a U.
\r
33471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
33474 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
\r
33475 can use an alternate keymap.
\r
33476 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
\r
33477 use an Italian keymap.
\r
33480 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33481 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33482 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
33485 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
\r
33486 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33492 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
\r
33497 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
\r
33498 which one you want to use.
\r
33501 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33502 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
\r
33503 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
\r
33504 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
\r
33505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
33508 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
\r
33509 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
\r
33510 one to support the characters you want.
\r
33511 This and many other customizations are explained in the
\r
33518 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
33519 \start_of_appendix
\r
33520 The User Interface
\r
33521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33522 LatexCommand label
\r
33523 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
\r
33530 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33531 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
\r
33532 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
\r
33533 topic inside the user's guide.
\r
33536 \begin_layout Section
\r
33538 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33550 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33555 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
\r
33558 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33562 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33563 Creates a new document.
\r
33566 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33567 New from Template
\r
33570 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33571 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
\r
33572 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
\r
33573 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
\r
33576 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33580 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33581 Opens a document.
\r
33584 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33588 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33589 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
\r
33590 Click there on a file to open it.
\r
33593 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33597 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33598 Closes the current document.
\r
33601 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33605 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33606 Closes all opened documents.
\r
33609 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33613 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33614 Saves the actual document.
\r
33617 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33621 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33622 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
\r
33625 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33629 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33630 Saves all opened documents.
\r
33633 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33637 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33638 Reloads the actual document from disk.
\r
33641 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33645 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33646 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
\r
33647 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
\r
33648 It is described in the section
\r
33650 Version Control in LyX
\r
33654 Additional Features
\r
33659 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33663 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33664 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
\r
33665 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
\r
33667 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
\r
33670 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33671 When using the menu entry
\r
33674 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33679 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
\r
33683 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33687 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33692 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
\r
33693 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
\r
33696 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
33698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
33699 LatexCommand label
\r
33700 name "sub:Export"
\r
33707 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33708 You can export your document to various file formats.
\r
33709 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
\r
33710 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
\r
33711 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
\r
33714 \begin_layout Standard
\r
33715 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
\r
33717 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
33723 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
33730 \begin_layout Description
\r
33736 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33750 yX format of the special LyX
\r
33751 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33754 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
\r
33755 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
33758 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
\r
33761 \begin_layout Description
\r
33762 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
\r
33764 \family typewriter
\r
33768 \begin_layout Description
\r
33770 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33773 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
\r
33775 \family typewriter
\r
33779 \begin_layout Description
\r
33780 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
\r
33781 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
\r
33782 files paths or file names in your document.
\r
33783 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
\r
33790 \begin_layout Description
\r
33791 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
\r
33792 in files paths or file names
\r
33795 \begin_layout Description
\r
33797 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33811 eX) DVI-format using the program
\r
33812 \family typewriter
\r
33815 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
\r
33818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
33821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33826 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
\r
33834 \begin_layout Description
\r
33836 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33839 Dot text file with code in the programming language
\r
33840 \family typewriter
\r
33843 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
\r
33844 \family typewriter
\r
33848 \begin_layout Description
\r
33849 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
\r
33850 work in all cases)
\r
33853 \begin_layout Description
\r
33855 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33859 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33862 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
\r
33866 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
\r
33867 not in the format
\r
33874 \begin_layout Description
\r
33881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33889 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33913 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
\r
33914 \family typewriter
\r
33918 \begin_layout Description
\r
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33933 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33938 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
\r
33939 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
\r
33940 \family typewriter
\r
33943 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
\r
33946 \begin_layout Description
\r
33953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33961 \begin_inset space ~
\r
33966 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
\r
33967 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
\r
33969 \family typewriter
\r
33975 \begin_layout Description
\r
33982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
33990 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34014 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
\r
34015 \family typewriter
\r
34019 \begin_layout Description
\r
34021 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34025 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34043 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
\r
34044 music notation software
\r
34045 \family typewriter
\r
34049 \begin_layout Description
\r
34056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34066 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34070 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34073 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
\r
34074 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
\r
34075 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
\r
34078 \begin_layout Description
\r
34085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34095 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34098 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
\r
34099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34114 represent the version number)
\r
34117 \begin_layout Description
\r
34124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34133 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
\r
34136 \begin_layout Description
\r
34137 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
\r
34138 \family typewriter
\r
34142 \begin_layout Description
\r
34143 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
\r
34145 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
\r
34148 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
\r
34152 \begin_layout Description
\r
34156 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34161 PDF-format using the program
\r
34162 \family typewriter
\r
34165 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
\r
34168 \begin_layout Description
\r
34172 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34188 PDF-format using the program
\r
34189 \family typewriter
\r
34192 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34195 \begin_layout Description
\r
34199 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34204 PDF-format using the program
\r
34205 \family typewriter
\r
34208 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34211 \begin_layout Description
\r
34215 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34220 PDF-format using the program
\r
34221 \family typewriter
\r
34224 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
\r
34227 \begin_layout Description
\r
34231 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34247 PDF-format using the program
\r
34248 \family typewriter
\r
34251 , produces PDF-files directly
\r
34254 \begin_layout Description
\r
34258 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34266 \begin_layout Description
\r
34270 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34274 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34279 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
\r
34280 and then exported as text using the program
\r
34285 \begin_layout Description
\r
34290 PostScript format using the program
\r
34291 \family typewriter
\r
34295 \begin_layout Description
\r
34296 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
\r
34297 programming language
\r
34298 \family typewriter
\r
34303 \family typewriter
\r
34307 \family typewriter
\r
34310 it is possible to use
\r
34311 \family typewriter
\r
34314 -commands in LaTeX
\r
34317 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34318 If one of the menu entries
\r
34325 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34334 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
\r
34335 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
\r
34336 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34342 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
34347 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34351 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
34359 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34363 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34364 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
\r
34365 format or send it to a printer.
\r
34366 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
\r
34367 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
\r
34369 \family typewriter
\r
34373 For more information have a look at section
\r
34374 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34380 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
\r
34387 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34391 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34392 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
\r
34393 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
\r
34394 prefix, see section
\r
34395 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34401 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
34406 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
\r
34407 \family typewriter
\r
34411 \family typewriter
\r
34415 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
\r
34416 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
\r
34417 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34423 reference "sub:Converters"
\r
34430 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34431 New and Close Window
\r
34434 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34435 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
\r
34438 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34442 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34443 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
\r
34446 \begin_layout Section
\r
34448 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34460 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34464 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34465 Described in section
\r
34466 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34472 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
\r
34479 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34480 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
\r
34483 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34484 Described in section
\r
34485 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34491 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
34498 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34499 Select Whole Inset
\r
34502 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34503 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
\r
34504 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
\r
34507 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34512 Selects the whole document.
\r
34515 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34516 Find & Replace (Quick)
\r
34519 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34520 Described in section
\r
34521 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34527 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
\r
34534 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34535 Find & Replace (Advanced)
\r
34538 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34539 Described in section
\r
34540 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34546 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
\r
34553 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34554 Move Paragraph Up/Down
\r
34557 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34558 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
\r
34562 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34566 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34567 Described in section
\r
34568 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34574 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
\r
34581 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34582 Paragraph Settings
\r
34583 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34587 Paragraph ! Settings
\r
34595 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34596 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
\r
34597 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
\r
34601 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34602 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
\r
34603 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
\r
34605 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
34611 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34619 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34620 Table Settings and Math
\r
34623 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34624 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
\r
34626 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
\r
34627 The properties of tables are described in section
\r
34628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34634 reference "sec:Tables"
\r
34638 , the properties of formulas in chapter
\r
34639 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34645 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
34652 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34653 Increase / Decrease List Depth
\r
34656 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34657 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
\r
34659 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
\r
34660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34666 reference "sec:Nesting"
\r
34671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34673 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
34680 \begin_layout Section
\r
34682 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34694 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34695 At the bottom of the
\r
34699 menu the opened documents are listed.
\r
34702 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34703 Open/Close all Insets
\r
34706 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34707 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
\r
34710 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34711 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
\r
34714 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34715 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
\r
34718 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34719 Math macros are described in the
\r
34726 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34730 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34731 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
\r
34733 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34739 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
34746 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34750 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34751 Opens a window showing console messages.
\r
34752 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
\r
34753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34756 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
\r
34757 while LaTeX is processing the document.
\r
34760 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34764 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34765 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
\r
34766 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
\r
34767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34773 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34777 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
\r
34778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34784 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
34788 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
\r
34789 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
\r
34790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34796 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34801 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
\r
34802 The default output format is
\r
34805 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34813 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34814 View (Other Formats)
\r
34817 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34818 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
\r
34819 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
\r
34820 actual document with an external program.
\r
34821 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
\r
34822 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
\r
34823 All possible formats are listed in section
\r
34824 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34830 reference "sub:Export"
\r
34835 You should at least see the menu entry
\r
34840 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
\r
34841 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
\r
34842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34848 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
34853 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
34856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
34857 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
34865 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34866 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
\r
34867 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
\r
34868 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34874 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34879 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
\r
34882 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34886 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34887 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
\r
34888 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
\r
34891 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34892 Update (Other Formats)
\r
34895 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34896 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
\r
34897 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
\r
34900 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34901 View Master Document
\r
34904 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34905 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
\r
34906 which is then its
\r
34907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34921 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34926 manual for more information on this topic).
\r
34927 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
\r
34928 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
\r
34933 generates the output of the whole book, while
\r
34937 will just output the chapter alone.
\r
34940 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34941 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
\r
34942 in the preferences (see sec.
\r
34943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34949 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
34953 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
\r
34954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
34958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
34960 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
34967 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
34968 Update Master Document
\r
34971 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34972 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
\r
34973 which is then its
\r
34974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
34978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
34988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
34993 manual for more information on this topic).
\r
34994 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
\r
34995 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
\r
34998 \begin_layout Standard
\r
34999 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
\r
35000 in the preferences (see sec.
\r
35001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
35005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35007 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
35011 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
\r
35012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
35016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35018 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
35025 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35029 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35030 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
\r
35031 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
\r
35032 to view the same document, but at different positions.
\r
35033 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
\r
35034 or more documents at the same time.
\r
35035 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
\r
35037 Close Current View
\r
35042 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35043 Close Current View
\r
35046 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35047 Closes a split view.
\r
35050 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35054 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35055 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
\r
35056 so that you will see nothing but your text.
\r
35057 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
\r
35058 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
\r
35059 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
\r
35062 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
35065 LatexCommand label
\r
35066 name "sub:Toolbars"
\r
35071 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35083 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35084 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
\r
35085 All toolbars and the
\r
35088 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35093 can be turned on and off.
\r
35098 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
\r
35110 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35118 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35127 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
\r
35131 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
\r
35138 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35143 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
\r
35147 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
\r
35148 or when a certain feature is enabled.
\r
35149 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
\r
35150 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
\r
35151 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
\r
35154 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35155 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
\r
35156 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35162 reference "sec:Toolbars"
\r
35169 \begin_layout Section
\r
35171 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35183 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35187 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35188 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
\r
35189 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35195 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
\r
35206 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35207 Special Character
\r
35208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
35209 LatexCommand label
\r
35210 name "sub:Special-Character"
\r
35217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35218 Here you can insert the following characters:
\r
35221 \begin_layout Description
\r
35222 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
\r
35223 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
\r
35224 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
\r
35225 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35229 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
35232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35237 Not all characters will be visible in the
\r
35241 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
\r
35243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
35247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35249 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
35253 ) can display every character.
\r
35261 \begin_layout Description
\r
35262 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\r
35266 \begin_layout Description
\r
35268 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35272 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35275 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
\r
35276 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35282 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
\r
35289 \begin_layout Description
\r
35291 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35294 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
\r
35297 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35307 \begin_layout Description
\r
35309 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35313 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809482
\r
35315 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809484
\r
35317 \change_unchanged
\r
35319 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809487
\r
35321 \begin_inset Quotes ers
\r
35325 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809513
\r
35326 in the quotation marks style selected in the
\r
35328 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35336 \change_unchanged
\r
35340 \begin_layout Description
\r
35342 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35345 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
\r
35349 \begin_layout Description
\r
35351 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35354 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
\r
35358 \begin_layout Description
\r
35360 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35363 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35367 \begin_layout Description
\r
35369 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35373 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35383 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35387 Language ! Phonetic symbols
\r
35393 \change_deleted -712698321 1345808954
\r
35394 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset
\r
35395 \change_inserted -712698321 1345808969
\r
35396 Inserts a box where
\r
35397 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809001
\r
35400 \change_unchanged
\r
35402 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809047
\r
35403 commands to create IPA phonetic
\r
35404 \change_unchanged
\r
35406 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809189
\r
35407 from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which
\r
35408 provides a large set of these symbols
\r
35409 \change_unchanged
\r
35412 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809068
\r
35414 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809068
\r
35416 \change_unchanged
\r
35418 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809224
\r
35419 with traditional LaTeX
\r
35420 \change_unchanged
\r
35421 you must have the LaTeX-package
\r
35426 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35430 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
\r
35436 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35440 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809282
\r
35442 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809283
\r
35444 \change_unchanged
\r
35445 ore information about this feature
\r
35446 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809286
\r
35447 we refer you to the documentation of
\r
35450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
35451 LatexCommand cite
\r
35458 and this Wiki-page:
\r
35459 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
35463 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
35466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35468 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
\r
35474 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809397
\r
35475 can be found in the Linguistics manual (
\r
35477 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35478 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
35479 Linguistics Manual
\r
35482 \change_unchanged
\r
35486 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35490 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35491 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
\r
35494 \begin_layout Description
\r
35495 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
\r
35496 \begin_inset script superscript
\r
35498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35507 \begin_layout Description
\r
35508 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
\r
35509 \begin_inset script subscript
\r
35511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35520 \begin_layout Description
\r
35522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35525 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
\r
35526 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35532 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
\r
35539 \begin_layout Description
\r
35541 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35544 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
\r
35545 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35551 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
\r
35558 \begin_layout Description
\r
35560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35563 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
\r
35564 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35570 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
\r
35577 \begin_layout Description
\r
35579 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35582 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
\r
35583 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35589 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
\r
35593 for a description.
\r
35596 \begin_layout Description
\r
35598 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35601 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
\r
35602 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35608 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
\r
35612 for a description.
\r
35615 \begin_layout Description
\r
35617 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35620 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
\r
35621 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35627 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
\r
35631 for a description.
\r
35634 \begin_layout Description
\r
35635 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
\r
35636 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35642 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
\r
35649 \begin_layout Description
\r
35651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35654 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
\r
35655 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35661 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
\r
35668 \begin_layout Description
\r
35670 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35673 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
\r
35674 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35680 reference "sub:Ligatures"
\r
35687 \begin_layout Description
\r
35689 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35693 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35696 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
\r
35697 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35703 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
35710 \begin_layout Description
\r
35712 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35715 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
\r
35716 text line to the page border, see section
\r
35717 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35723 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
\r
35730 \begin_layout Description
\r
35732 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35735 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
\r
35736 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35742 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
35749 \begin_layout Description
\r
35751 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35754 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
\r
35755 text page to the page border, described in section
\r
35756 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35762 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
\r
35769 \begin_layout Description
\r
35771 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35774 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
\r
35775 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35781 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
35788 \begin_layout Description
\r
35790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35794 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35797 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
\r
35798 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35804 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
\r
35811 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35815 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35816 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
\r
35817 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
\r
35819 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35825 reference "sec:toc"
\r
35830 The index list is described in section
\r
35831 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35837 reference "sec:Index"
\r
35841 , the nomenclature in section
\r
35842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35848 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
35852 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
\r
35853 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35859 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
35866 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35870 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35871 To insert floats, described in section
\r
35872 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35878 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
35885 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35889 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35890 To insert notes, described in section
\r
35891 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35897 reference "sec:Notes"
\r
35904 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35908 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35909 Inserts branch insets as described in section
\r
35910 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
35916 reference "sec:Branches"
\r
35923 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35927 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35928 Inserts document class-specific insets.
\r
35929 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
\r
35931 An example is the document class
\r
35932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
35935 article (Elsevier)
\r
35936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
35939 with three custom insets.
\r
35942 Flex insets and InsetLayout
\r
35948 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
\r
35951 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35953 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35957 External Material
\r
35965 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35966 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
\r
35967 in your document.
\r
35968 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
\r
35975 \begin_inset space ~
\r
35983 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
35985 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
35988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
35997 \begin_layout Standard
\r
35998 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
\r
35999 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36005 reference "sec:Minipages"
\r
36010 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
\r
36017 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36025 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36029 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36030 Inserts a citation as described in section
\r
36031 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36037 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
36044 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36048 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36049 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
\r
36050 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36056 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
36063 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36067 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36068 Inserts a label as described in section
\r
36069 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36075 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
36082 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36084 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36094 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36098 Longtables ! Caption
\r
36106 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36107 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
\r
36108 Floats are described in section
\r
36109 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36115 reference "sec:Floats"
\r
36119 , captions in longtables are described in the section
\r
36121 Longtable Captions
\r
36126 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36134 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36138 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36139 Inserts an index entry as described in section
\r
36140 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36146 reference "sec:Index"
\r
36153 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36154 Nomenclature Entry
\r
36157 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36158 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
\r
36159 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36165 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
\r
36172 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36176 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36178 Tables are described in section
\r
36179 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36185 reference "sec:Tables"
\r
36192 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36196 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36197 Inserts a graphic.
\r
36198 Graphics are described in section
\r
36199 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36205 reference "sec:Graphics"
\r
36212 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36216 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36217 Inserts a URL as described in section
\r
36218 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36224 reference "sub:URLs"
\r
36231 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36235 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36236 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
\r
36237 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36243 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
\r
36250 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36254 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36255 Inserts a footnote, see section
\r
36256 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36262 reference "sec:Footnotes"
\r
36269 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36273 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36274 Inserts a marginal note, see section
\r
36275 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36281 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
\r
36288 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36292 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36293 Inserts a short title, see section
\r
36294 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36300 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
\r
36307 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36311 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36312 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
\r
36313 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36319 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
\r
36323 for a description.
\r
36326 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36328 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36340 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36341 Inserts a program listings box.
\r
36342 Program listings are explained in the chapter
\r
36344 Program Code Listings
\r
36349 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36357 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36361 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36362 Inserts the actual date.
\r
36363 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
\r
36365 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
\r
36368 External Material
\r
36373 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36381 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36385 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36386 Inserts a preview inset, see section
\r
36387 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36393 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
36397 for a description.
\r
36400 \begin_layout Section
\r
36401 The Navigate Menu
\r
36402 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36414 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36415 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
\r
36416 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36419 of the current document.
\r
36420 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
\r
36423 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36427 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36428 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
\r
36429 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
\r
36431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
36435 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
36439 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36443 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
\r
36444 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36447 2.5 and use the submenu
\r
36450 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36454 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36460 Then go to section
\r
36461 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36467 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36471 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36477 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
\r
36478 the key bindings
\r
36479 \begin_inset Info
\r
36481 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
\r
36485 \begin_inset Info
\r
36487 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
\r
36493 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36494 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
\r
36495 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
\r
36498 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36499 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
\r
36502 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36503 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
\r
36507 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36511 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36512 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
\r
36513 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
\r
36514 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
\r
36518 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36530 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36534 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36535 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
\r
36536 in the output, see section
\r
36539 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36547 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36552 manual for a detailed description.
\r
36555 \begin_layout Section
\r
36556 The Document Menu
\r
36557 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36569 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36573 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36574 Change Tracking is described in section
\r
36575 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36581 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
36588 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36603 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36604 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
\r
36606 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
\r
36609 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36610 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
\r
36615 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
\r
36618 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36622 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36623 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
\r
36624 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36630 reference "sec:Navigating"
\r
36635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36637 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
\r
36644 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36645 Start Appendix Here
\r
36648 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36649 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
\r
36650 position as described in section
\r
36651 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36657 reference "sec:Appendices"
\r
36664 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36668 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36669 Un/compresses the current document.
\r
36672 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36676 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36677 The document settings are described in appendix
\r
36678 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36684 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
\r
36691 \begin_layout Section
\r
36693 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36705 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36709 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36710 Spell checking is explained in section
\r
36711 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36717 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
36724 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36728 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36729 The thesaurus is described in section
\r
36730 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36736 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
\r
36743 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36745 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36755 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36767 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36768 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
\r
36772 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36774 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36786 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36787 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
\r
36791 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36793 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36797 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
\r
36801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36808 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
36812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36825 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36829 Reconfiguration of LyX
\r
36837 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36838 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
\r
36839 and programs it needs; see also section
\r
36840 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36846 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
\r
36853 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36857 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36858 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
\r
36859 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36865 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
\r
36872 \begin_layout Section
\r
36874 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36886 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36887 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
\r
36889 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
\r
36893 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36897 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36902 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
\r
36903 found by LyX (see also section
\r
36904 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36910 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
\r
36917 \begin_layout Section
\r
36919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
36920 LatexCommand label
\r
36921 name "sec:Toolbars"
\r
36928 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36929 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
\r
36930 \begin_inset space ~
\r
36934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
36936 reference "sub:Toolbars"
\r
36943 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36944 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
\r
36945 This is described in the
\r
36947 Additional Features
\r
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
36954 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
36958 Toolbar ! Standard
\r
36966 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36967 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
36968 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
\r
36976 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36977 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
36983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
36984 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
36989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37001 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
37004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37005 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
\r
37010 manual for more information.
\r
37018 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37019 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37025 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37026 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37027 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
\r
37028 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37029 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37030 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37033 \begin_inset Text
\r
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37036 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
37037 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
\r
37047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37048 \begin_inset Text
\r
37050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37051 pull-down box for the environments
\r
37064 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37065 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
\r
37071 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37073 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
\r
37075 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37076 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37077 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37080 \begin_inset Text
\r
37082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37085 \begin_inset Info
\r
37095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37096 \begin_inset Text
\r
37098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37101 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37110 \begin_inset Text
\r
37112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37115 \begin_inset Info
\r
37125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37126 \begin_inset Text
\r
37128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37131 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37140 \begin_inset Text
\r
37142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37145 \begin_inset Info
\r
37147 arg "buffer-write"
\r
37155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37156 \begin_inset Text
\r
37158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37161 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37170 \begin_inset Text
\r
37172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37175 \begin_inset Info
\r
37177 arg "dialog-show print"
\r
37185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37186 \begin_inset Text
\r
37188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37191 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37200 \begin_inset Text
\r
37202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37205 \begin_inset Info
\r
37207 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
\r
37215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37216 \begin_inset Text
\r
37218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37221 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37230 \begin_inset Text
\r
37232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37235 \begin_inset Info
\r
37245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37246 \begin_inset Text
\r
37248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37251 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37260 \begin_inset Text
\r
37262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37265 \begin_inset Info
\r
37275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37276 \begin_inset Text
\r
37278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37281 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37288 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37290 \begin_inset Text
\r
37292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37295 \begin_inset Info
\r
37305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37306 \begin_inset Text
\r
37308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37311 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37320 \begin_inset Text
\r
37322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37325 \begin_inset Info
\r
37335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37336 \begin_inset Text
\r
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37341 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37350 \begin_inset Text
\r
37352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37355 \begin_inset Info
\r
37365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37366 \begin_inset Text
\r
37368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37380 \begin_inset Text
\r
37382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37385 \begin_inset Info
\r
37387 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
\r
37395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37396 \begin_inset Text
\r
37398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37401 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37422 \begin_inset Text
\r
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37425 \begin_inset Info
\r
37427 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
\r
37435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37436 \begin_inset Text
\r
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37441 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
37460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37462 \begin_inset Text
\r
37464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37467 \begin_inset Info
\r
37469 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
\r
37477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37478 \begin_inset Text
\r
37480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37483 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37484 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37493 \begin_inset Text
\r
37495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37498 \begin_inset Info
\r
37508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37509 \begin_inset Text
\r
37511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37512 Emphasize text, function of the
\r
37514 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37516 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37519 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37530 \begin_inset Text
\r
37532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37535 \begin_inset Info
\r
37545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37546 \begin_inset Text
\r
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37549 Set text to noun style, function of the
\r
37551 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37553 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37556 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37567 \begin_inset Text
\r
37569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37572 \begin_inset Info
\r
37574 arg "textstyle-apply"
\r
37582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37583 \begin_inset Text
\r
37585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37586 Format text using the current settings in the
\r
37588 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37590 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37593 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37604 \begin_inset Text
\r
37606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37609 \begin_inset Info
\r
37619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37620 \begin_inset Text
\r
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37625 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37626 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37628 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37639 \begin_inset Text
\r
37641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37644 \begin_inset Info
\r
37646 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
\r
37654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37655 \begin_inset Text
\r
37657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37660 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37669 \begin_inset Text
\r
37671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37672 \begin_inset Info
\r
37674 arg "tabular-insert"
\r
37682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37683 \begin_inset Text
\r
37685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37688 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37697 \begin_inset Text
\r
37699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37702 \begin_inset Info
\r
37704 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
\r
37712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37713 \begin_inset Text
\r
37715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37716 Toggle outline window on/off,
\r
37718 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37727 \begin_inset Text
\r
37729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37732 \begin_inset Info
\r
37734 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
\r
37742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37743 \begin_inset Text
\r
37745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37746 Toggle math toolbar on/off
\r
37752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37754 \begin_inset Text
\r
37756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37759 \begin_inset Info
\r
37761 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
\r
37769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37770 \begin_inset Text
\r
37772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37773 Toggle table toolbar on/off
\r
37786 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
37788 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
37791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37800 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37801 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
37802 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
\r
37810 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37811 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37817 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37818 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
37822 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37823 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
37829 \begin_layout Standard
\r
37830 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
37831 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
\r
37832 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
37833 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37834 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
37835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37837 \begin_inset Text
\r
37839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37842 \begin_inset Info
\r
37852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37853 \begin_inset Text
\r
37855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37864 \begin_inset Text
\r
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37869 \begin_inset Info
\r
37871 arg "layout Enumerate"
\r
37879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37880 \begin_inset Text
\r
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37891 \begin_inset Text
\r
37893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37896 \begin_inset Info
\r
37898 arg "layout Itemize"
\r
37906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37907 \begin_inset Text
\r
37909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37918 \begin_inset Text
\r
37920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37923 \begin_inset Info
\r
37925 arg "layout List"
\r
37933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37934 \begin_inset Text
\r
37936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37945 \begin_inset Text
\r
37947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37950 \begin_inset Info
\r
37952 arg "layout Description"
\r
37960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37961 \begin_inset Text
\r
37963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
37971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37972 \begin_inset Text
\r
37974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37977 \begin_inset Info
\r
37979 arg "depth-increment"
\r
37987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
37988 \begin_inset Text
\r
37990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
37993 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
37995 \begin_inset space ~
\r
37999 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38010 \begin_inset Text
\r
38012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38015 \begin_inset Info
\r
38017 arg "depth-decrement"
\r
38025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38026 \begin_inset Text
\r
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38033 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38048 \begin_inset Text
\r
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38053 \begin_inset Info
\r
38055 arg "float-insert figure"
\r
38063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38064 \begin_inset Text
\r
38066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38069 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38070 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38079 \begin_inset Text
\r
38081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38084 \begin_inset Info
\r
38086 arg "float-insert table"
\r
38094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38095 \begin_inset Text
\r
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38100 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38101 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38110 \begin_inset Text
\r
38112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38115 \begin_inset Info
\r
38117 arg "label-insert"
\r
38125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38126 \begin_inset Text
\r
38128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38140 \begin_inset Text
\r
38142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38145 \begin_inset Info
\r
38147 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
\r
38155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38156 \begin_inset Text
\r
38158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38161 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38170 \begin_inset Text
\r
38172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38175 \begin_inset Info
\r
38177 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
\r
38185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38186 \begin_inset Text
\r
38188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38191 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38200 \begin_inset Text
\r
38202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38205 \begin_inset Info
\r
38207 arg "index-insert"
\r
38215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38216 \begin_inset Text
\r
38218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38221 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38223 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38234 \begin_inset Text
\r
38236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38239 \begin_inset Info
\r
38241 arg "nomencl-insert"
\r
38249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38250 \begin_inset Text
\r
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38255 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38257 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38268 \begin_inset Text
\r
38270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38273 \begin_inset Info
\r
38275 arg "footnote-insert"
\r
38283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38284 \begin_inset Text
\r
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38289 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38298 \begin_inset Text
\r
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38303 \begin_inset Info
\r
38305 arg "marginalnote-insert"
\r
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38314 \begin_inset Text
\r
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38321 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38330 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38332 \begin_inset Text
\r
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38337 \begin_inset Info
\r
38339 arg "note-insert"
\r
38347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38348 \begin_inset Text
\r
38350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38353 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38354 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38367 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38378 \begin_inset Text
\r
38380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38383 \begin_inset Info
\r
38385 arg "box-insert Frameless"
\r
38393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38394 \begin_inset Text
\r
38396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38399 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38408 \begin_inset Text
\r
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38413 \begin_inset Info
\r
38415 arg "href-insert"
\r
38423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38424 \begin_inset Text
\r
38426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38429 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38438 \begin_inset Text
\r
38440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38443 \begin_inset Info
\r
38453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38454 \begin_inset Text
\r
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38459 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38476 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38487 \begin_inset Text
\r
38489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38492 \begin_inset Info
\r
38494 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
\r
38502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38503 \begin_inset Text
\r
38505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38508 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38509 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38518 \begin_inset Text
\r
38520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38523 \begin_inset Info
\r
38525 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
\r
38533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38534 \begin_inset Text
\r
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38539 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38540 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38542 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38553 \begin_inset Text
\r
38555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38558 \begin_inset Info
\r
38560 arg "dialog-show character"
\r
38568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38569 \begin_inset Text
\r
38571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38574 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38576 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38579 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38588 \begin_inset Text
\r
38590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38593 \begin_inset Info
\r
38595 arg "layout-paragraph"
\r
38603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38604 \begin_inset Text
\r
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38609 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38611 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38622 \begin_inset Text
\r
38624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38627 \begin_inset Info
\r
38629 arg "thesaurus-entry"
\r
38637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38638 \begin_inset Text
\r
38640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38643 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38657 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
38658 View/Update Toolbar
\r
38659 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38663 Toolbar ! View / Update
\r
38671 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38672 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38673 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
\r
38680 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38681 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
38687 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38688 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
\r
38692 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38693 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
\r
38699 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38700 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
38701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
\r
38702 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
\r
38703 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
38704 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
38705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38707 \begin_inset Text
\r
38709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38712 \begin_inset Info
\r
38714 arg "buffer-view"
\r
38722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38723 \begin_inset Text
\r
38725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38728 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38737 \begin_inset Text
\r
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38742 \begin_inset Info
\r
38744 arg "buffer-update"
\r
38752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38753 \begin_inset Text
\r
38755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38758 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38767 \begin_inset Text
\r
38769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38772 \begin_inset Info
\r
38774 arg "master-buffer-view"
\r
38782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38783 \begin_inset Text
\r
38785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38788 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38801 \begin_inset Text
\r
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38806 \begin_inset Info
\r
38808 arg "master-buffer-update"
\r
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38817 \begin_inset Text
\r
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38822 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38824 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38828 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38837 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38839 \begin_inset Text
\r
38841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38844 \begin_inset Info
\r
38846 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
\r
38854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38855 \begin_inset Text
\r
38857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38860 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38861 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38862 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38863 Synchronize with Output
\r
38869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38871 \begin_inset Text
\r
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38874 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38875 filename ../images/view-others.png
\r
38877 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
38888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38889 \begin_inset Text
\r
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38894 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38895 View (Other Formats)
\r
38901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
\r
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38903 \begin_inset Text
\r
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38906 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
38907 filename ../images/update-others.png
\r
38909 groupId toolbarbuttons
\r
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\r
38919 \begin_inset Text
\r
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38924 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
38925 Update (Other Formats)
\r
38938 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38939 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
\r
38943 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
38947 \begin_layout Standard
\r
38948 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
\r
38949 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
38955 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
38959 , the table toolbar
\r
38960 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38972 \begin_inset space ~
\r
38977 manual and the math macro toolbar
\r
38978 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
38981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
38994 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
38995 The Document Settings
\r
38996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
38997 LatexCommand label
\r
38998 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
\r
39003 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39007 Document ! Settings
\r
39015 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39016 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
\r
39017 whole document and is called with the menu
\r
39019 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39023 You can save your document settings as default with the
\r
39025 Save as Document Defaults
\r
39027 button in the dialog.
\r
39028 This will create a template named
\r
39029 \family typewriter
\r
39032 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
\r
39033 using a template.
\r
39036 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39039 Use Class Defaults
\r
39041 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
\r
39042 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
\r
39045 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39046 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
\r
39049 \begin_layout Section
\r
39053 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39054 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
\r
39056 Document classes are described in section
\r
39057 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39063 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
\r
39071 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39075 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39080 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
\r
39084 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
\r
39085 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
\r
39087 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
\r
39096 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39097 Some classes use special class options by default.
\r
39098 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
\r
39102 and you can decide to use them or not.
\r
39103 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
\r
39104 recommended to leave them untouched.
\r
39109 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
\r
39114 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
\r
39115 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
\r
39117 \begin_inset Foot
\r
39120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39121 When you want to use one of the following drivers
\r
39122 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39127 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
\r
39130 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39133 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
\r
39139 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
39140 LatexCommand href
\r
39141 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
\r
39153 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39154 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
\r
39156 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
\r
39157 document is opened without its master.
\r
39158 This way child documents are always compilable.
\r
39159 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
\r
39166 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39174 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39175 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
\r
39185 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39189 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
39195 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39199 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
39204 for cross-references, see sec.
\r
39205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
39209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39211 reference "sec:Cross-References"
\r
39218 \begin_layout Section
\r
39222 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39223 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
\r
39224 Please refer to the section
\r
39227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39235 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39240 manual for details.
\r
39243 \begin_layout Section
\r
39247 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39248 Modules are explained in section
\r
39249 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39255 reference "sub:Modules"
\r
39262 \begin_layout Section
\r
39266 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39268 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39274 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
\r
39278 for a description.
\r
39281 \begin_layout Section
\r
39285 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39286 The document font settings are described in section
\r
39287 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39293 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
\r
39300 \begin_layout Section
\r
39304 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39305 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
\r
39307 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
\r
39310 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39311 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
\r
39312 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
\r
39314 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
\r
39317 \begin_layout Section
\r
39321 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39322 A description of this menu is given in section
\r
39323 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39329 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
\r
39334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39336 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
\r
39343 \begin_layout Section
\r
39347 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39348 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
\r
39349 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39355 reference "sub:Margins"
\r
39362 \begin_layout Section
\r
39364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
39365 LatexCommand label
\r
39366 name "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
39371 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39375 Language ! Encoding
\r
39383 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39384 The document language and quote styles are set here.
\r
39385 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
\r
39386 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
\r
39387 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
\r
39388 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
\r
39389 known for a particular character).
\r
39390 \begin_inset Foot
\r
39393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39394 The known commands are defined in a text file (
\r
39399 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
\r
39404 manual for details.
\r
39412 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39413 If you use the option
\r
39417 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
\r
39418 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
\r
39419 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
\r
39420 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
\r
39421 exactly one encoding.
\r
39422 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
\r
39425 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39426 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
\r
39427 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
\r
39428 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
\r
39429 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
\r
39430 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
\r
39431 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
\r
39436 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
\r
39437 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
\r
39438 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
\r
39439 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
\r
39440 engines to standard LaTeX.
\r
39441 Both engines support Unicode natively.
\r
39442 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
\r
39445 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39464 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39483 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39489 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39495 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
\r
39500 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
\r
39504 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
\r
39507 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39511 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39516 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
\r
39518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
39522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
39526 The possible settings are:
\r
39529 \begin_layout Description
\r
39530 Default uses the language package that is selected in
\r
39532 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39533 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
39534 Language Settings
\r
39537 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
39543 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
39550 \begin_layout Description
\r
39551 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
\r
39552 format you will use.
\r
39553 In many cases this will be
\r
39558 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39562 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
39568 If the newer package
\r
39573 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39577 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
\r
39582 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
\r
39583 this package will be used instead of
\r
39590 \begin_layout Description
\r
39592 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39603 would be more appropriate.
\r
39606 \begin_layout Description
\r
39607 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
\r
39608 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
\r
39612 (for German texts), type in
\r
39615 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
39620 usepackage{ngerman}
\r
39623 \begin_layout Description
\r
39624 None will not use a language package.
\r
39625 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
\r
39628 \begin_layout Standard
\r
39629 Here is a list with the important encodings:
\r
39632 \begin_layout Description
\r
39634 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39638 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39642 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39645 inputenc) Same as
\r
39649 , but the LaTeX-package
\r
39654 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39658 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
\r
39664 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
\r
39665 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
\r
39666 languages in TeX code.
\r
39669 \begin_layout Description
\r
39670 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
\r
39671 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
\r
39672 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
\r
39675 \begin_layout Description
\r
39677 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39681 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39684 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
\r
39687 \begin_layout Description
\r
39689 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39693 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39696 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
\r
39699 \begin_layout Description
\r
39701 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39704 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
\r
39707 \begin_layout Description
\r
39709 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39713 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39716 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
\r
39717 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
\r
39720 \begin_layout Description
\r
39722 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39726 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39729 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
\r
39733 \begin_layout Description
\r
39735 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39739 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39742 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
\r
39743 ISO-8859-13 encoding
\r
39746 \begin_layout Description
\r
39748 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39752 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39756 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39759 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
\r
39760 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39766 \begin_layout Description
\r
39768 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39772 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39776 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39779 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
\r
39780 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
\r
39783 \begin_layout Description
\r
39785 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39789 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39792 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
\r
39793 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
\r
39794 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
\r
39795 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39799 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39805 \begin_layout Description
\r
39807 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39811 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39814 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
\r
39815 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
\r
39816 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
\r
39817 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
\r
39818 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39822 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39828 \begin_layout Description
\r
39830 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39834 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39837 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
\r
39840 \begin_layout Description
\r
39842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39846 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39849 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
\r
39852 \begin_layout Description
\r
39854 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39858 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39861 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
\r
39864 \begin_layout Description
\r
39866 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39869 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
\r
39872 \begin_layout Description
\r
39874 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39877 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
\r
39880 \begin_layout Description
\r
39882 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39886 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39889 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
\r
39892 \begin_layout Description
\r
39894 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39898 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39901 8859-7) for Greek
\r
39904 \begin_layout Description
\r
39906 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39910 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39913 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
\r
39916 \begin_layout Description
\r
39918 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39922 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39925 8859-8) for Hebrew
\r
39928 \begin_layout Description
\r
39930 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39934 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39937 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39942 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39946 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
39951 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
39956 \begin_layout Description
\r
39958 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39962 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39965 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39969 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
39972 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39978 \begin_layout Description
\r
39980 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39984 \begin_inset space ~
\r
39987 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
39992 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
39996 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
\r
40001 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40006 \begin_layout Description
\r
40008 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40012 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40015 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40019 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40024 \begin_layout Description
\r
40026 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40030 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40033 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
\r
40037 , when using this, set the document language to
\r
40042 \begin_layout Description
\r
40044 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40047 (EUC-KR) for Korean
\r
40050 \begin_layout Description
\r
40052 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40056 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40060 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40063 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
\r
40066 \begin_layout Description
\r
40068 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40072 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40076 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40079 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
\r
40080 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
\r
40081 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
\r
40084 \begin_layout Description
\r
40086 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40090 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40096 \begin_layout Description
\r
40098 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40102 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40105 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
\r
40106 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
\r
40109 \begin_layout Description
\r
40111 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40115 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40118 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
\r
40123 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40127 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
\r
40132 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
\r
40135 \begin_layout Description
\r
40137 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40141 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40144 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
\r
40152 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
\r
40157 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
\r
40159 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
\r
40162 \begin_layout Description
\r
40164 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40168 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40171 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
\r
40176 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40180 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
\r
40185 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
\r
40188 \begin_layout Description
\r
40190 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40193 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
\r
40198 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40202 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
\r
40208 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
\r
40212 \begin_layout Description
\r
40214 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40218 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40222 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40225 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
\r
40226 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40232 \begin_layout Description
\r
40234 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40238 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40242 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40245 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
\r
40246 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
\r
40247 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
\r
40251 \begin_layout Description
\r
40253 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40257 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40261 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40264 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
\r
40265 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
\r
40268 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40269 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
\r
40270 current document.
\r
40272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
40276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40278 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
40282 for more information on the language package.
\r
40285 \begin_layout Section
\r
40287 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40291 Color ! main text
\r
40297 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40301 Color ! background
\r
40309 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40310 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
\r
40312 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40315 out notes (default: light grey).
\r
40320 sets the color back to the default.
\r
40323 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40324 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
\r
40326 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40329 boxes (default: red).
\r
40332 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40333 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
40336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40337 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
\r
40339 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40342 out note appears blue in the output.)
\r
40350 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40351 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
\r
40354 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40359 in the document settings under
\r
40362 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40367 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
\r
40370 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40378 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40384 For example the option
\r
40387 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40393 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40394 sets the link text color to black.
\r
40395 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
\r
40400 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40404 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
40410 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
40411 LatexCommand cite
\r
40419 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40420 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
\r
40426 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40427 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
\r
40428 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
\r
40429 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40432 Code behind a forced page break:
\r
40435 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40436 For the page color:
\r
40437 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40444 pagecolor{color name}
\r
40447 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40448 For the text color:
\r
40449 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40456 color{color name}
\r
40459 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40460 The color name can hereby be one of these:
\r
40493 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40496 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
\r
40500 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40501 For the page background color:
\r
40502 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40507 page_backgroundcolor
\r
40510 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40511 For the main text color:
\r
40512 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40517 document_fontcolor
\r
40520 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40525 box background color:
\r
40526 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40534 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
40536 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40539 out note text color:
\r
40540 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
40548 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40549 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
\r
40552 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40560 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40568 \begin_layout Section
\r
40572 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40573 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
\r
40574 depth in the table of contents as described in section
\r
40575 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40581 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
\r
40588 \begin_layout Section
\r
40592 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40593 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
\r
40598 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40602 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
\r
40612 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40616 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
\r
40622 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
\r
40627 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40631 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
\r
40636 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
\r
40638 For a further description see section
\r
40639 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40645 reference "sec:Bibliography"
\r
40652 \begin_layout Section
\r
40656 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40657 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
\r
40658 and you can define additional indexes.
\r
40659 Please refer to section
\r
40660 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40666 reference "sec:Index"
\r
40673 \begin_layout Section
\r
40677 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40678 The PDF properties are explained in section
\r
40679 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40685 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
\r
40692 \begin_layout Section
\r
40696 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40697 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
\r
40702 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40706 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
\r
40716 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40720 LaTeX-packages ! esint
\r
40730 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40734 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
\r
40744 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
40747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
40748 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
\r
40753 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
\r
40756 \begin_layout Description
\r
40757 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
\r
40758 ensure that you have enabled
\r
40761 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40769 \begin_layout Description
\r
40770 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
\r
40773 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40785 \begin_layout Description
\r
40786 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
\r
40797 \begin_layout Description
\r
40798 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
\r
40800 Chemical Symbols and Equations
\r
40809 \begin_layout Section
\r
40813 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40814 The float placement options are described in section
\r
40817 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40825 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40833 \begin_layout Section
\r
40837 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40838 The listings settings are explained in chapter
\r
40840 Program Code Listings
\r
40845 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40853 \begin_layout Section
\r
40857 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40858 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
\r
40859 The itemize environment is described in section
\r
40860 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40866 reference "sec:Itemize"
\r
40873 \begin_layout Section
\r
40877 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40878 Branches are described in section
\r
40879 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40885 reference "sec:Branches"
\r
40892 \begin_layout Section
\r
40894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
40895 LatexCommand label
\r
40896 name "sec:Doc-Output"
\r
40903 \begin_layout Standard
\r
40904 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
\r
40907 \begin_layout Description
\r
40909 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40913 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40916 Format: The format that is used when you hit
\r
40917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40936 View Master Document
\r
40937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
40944 Update Master Document
\r
40945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
40952 menu or the toolbar.
\r
40953 The default is set in
\r
40955 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
40956 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
40960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
40964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
40966 reference "sec:File-Formats"
\r
40973 \begin_layout Description
\r
40975 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40979 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40982 Output settings for the menu
\r
40984 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
40986 \begin_inset space ~
\r
40992 For a detailed description see section
\r
40994 Reverse DVI/PDF search
\r
40999 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41007 \begin_layout Description
\r
41009 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41013 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41016 Options settings for the export format
\r
41024 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41029 will assure that the output follows exactly version
\r
41030 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41033 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
\r
41037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41042 settings are described in detail in section
\r
41044 Math Output in XHTML
\r
41049 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41055 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
\r
41058 \begin_layout Section
\r
41063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41073 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41074 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
\r
41075 or to define LaTeX-commands.
\r
41076 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
\r
41077 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
\r
41081 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41082 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
\r
41083 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41089 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
\r
41096 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
41102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41103 LatexCommand label
\r
41104 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
\r
41109 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41121 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41122 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
\r
41124 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41128 It has the following submenus.
\r
41131 \begin_layout Section
\r
41135 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41140 User Interface File
\r
41141 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41145 Customization ! of toolbars
\r
41151 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41155 Customization ! of menus
\r
41163 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41164 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
\r
41165 interface (ui) file.
\r
41166 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
\r
41171 loads three files:
\r
41174 \begin_layout Description
\r
41179 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
\r
41182 \begin_layout Description
\r
41189 the menu entries in popup context menus
\r
41192 \begin_layout Description
\r
41197 specifies the toolbar buttons
\r
41200 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41201 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
\r
41202 and edit the entries.
\r
41205 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41206 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
\r
41218 entries must be finished with an explicit
\r
41223 They may contain
\r
41243 and in the case of the
\r
41244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41256 The syntax for the entries is:
\r
41259 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41260 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41288 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41290 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41293 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
\r
41295 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41308 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41316 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41317 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
41323 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41324 For example, assuming you use the menu
\r
41326 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41329 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
\r
41333 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41334 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41358 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41360 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
\r
41364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41367 navigate_bookmarks
\r
41368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41375 to have the sixth bookmark.
\r
41378 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41382 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41387 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
\r
41388 The currently available icon sets are compared in
\r
41389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
41390 LatexCommand href
\r
41391 name "this image"
\r
41392 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
\r
41399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41403 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41406 Enable tool tips in main work area
\r
41408 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
\r
41412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41416 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41419 Restore window layouts and geometries
\r
41421 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
\r
41422 in the last LyX session.
\r
41425 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41428 Restore cursor positions
\r
41430 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
\r
41431 the last session.
\r
41434 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41437 Load opened files from last session
\r
41439 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
\r
41442 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41445 Clear all session information
\r
41447 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
\r
41448 of last opened documents, etc.).
\r
41451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41454 LatexCommand label
\r
41455 name "sub:Backup documents"
\r
41460 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41464 Backup ! Documents
\r
41472 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41475 Backup original documents when saving
\r
41477 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
\r
41478 it was saved the last time.
\r
41479 It is stored in the
\r
41482 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41488 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41494 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
41498 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
\r
41501 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41507 The backup file has the file extension
\r
41508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
41516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
41522 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41525 Backup documents, every
\r
41527 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
\r
41530 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41533 Save documents compressed by default
\r
41535 always saves files in a compressed format.
\r
41538 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41541 Maximum last files
\r
41543 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
\r
41546 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41548 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41559 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41562 Open documents in tabs
\r
41564 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
\r
41567 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41572 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
\r
41573 \begin_inset Foot
\r
41576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41584 reference "sec:Paths"
\r
41588 for information about LyXServer pipes.
\r
41594 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
\r
41596 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
\r
41599 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41602 Single close-tab button
\r
41604 is checked, there will only be one close button (
\r
41607 \begin_inset Graphics
\r
41608 filename ../images/closetab.png
\r
41615 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
\r
41616 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
\r
41619 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
41623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41628 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
\r
41636 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41638 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
41649 LatexCommand label
\r
41650 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
\r
41657 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41658 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
\r
41661 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
41665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41670 This section only deals with the fonts
\r
41675 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
\r
41678 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41679 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
41690 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41691 By default, LyX uses
\r
41692 \family typewriter
\r
41700 \family typewriter
\r
41704 \family typewriter
\r
41707 (depends on the system) as its
\r
41710 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41716 \family typewriter
\r
41720 \family typewriter
\r
41726 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41727 You can change the font size with the
\r
41734 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41739 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
\r
41741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41744 points have the size of 1
\r
41745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41748 inch, see Appendix
\r
41749 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41755 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
41760 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
\r
41761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
41765 The sizes are explained in detail in section
\r
41766 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41772 reference "sub:Document-Font"
\r
41779 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41782 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
\r
41784 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
\r
41785 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
\r
41786 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
\r
41787 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
\r
41789 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
\r
41790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41796 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41798 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41802 Color ! LyX screen
\r
41808 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41820 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41821 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
\r
41822 the list and selecting the
\r
41829 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41830 By checking the option
\r
41832 Use system colors
\r
41834 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
\r
41837 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
\r
41838 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41842 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41847 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
\r
41850 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41852 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41856 Settings ! Display
\r
41864 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41865 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
\r
41868 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41873 enables previewing snippets of your document.
\r
41874 This feature is described in section
\r
41875 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
41881 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
\r
41888 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41889 Checking the option
\r
41892 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41896 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41900 \begin_inset space ~
\r
41905 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
\r
41908 \begin_layout Section
\r
41910 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
41914 Settings ! Editing
\r
41922 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
41926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
41930 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41933 Cursor follows scrollbar
\r
41935 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
\r
41939 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41940 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
\r
41941 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
\r
41942 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
\r
41945 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41948 Scroll below end of document
\r
41950 is self-explanatory.
\r
41953 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41954 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
\r
41961 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
\r
41963 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
\r
41964 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
\r
41967 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41970 Sort environments alphabetically
\r
41972 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
\r
41975 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41978 Group environments by their category
\r
41980 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
\r
41983 \begin_layout Standard
\r
41988 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
\r
41999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42003 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42004 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
\r
42009 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
\r
42010 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
\r
42011 appears centered.
\r
42014 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42016 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42026 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42030 Settings ! Shortcuts
\r
42038 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42043 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
\r
42044 Several binding files are available, among them:
\r
42047 \begin_layout Description
\r
42048 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
\r
42051 \begin_layout Description
\r
42052 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
\r
42064 \begin_layout Description
\r
42065 mac.bind a set of bindings for
\r
42068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42076 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42077 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
\r
42082 , and binding files for special languages.
\r
42083 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
\r
42084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42088 \begin_inset space \space{}
\r
42092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42100 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
\r
42104 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42105 Some binding files, like
\r
42109 , only have a limited scope.
\r
42110 When looking at the end of the file
\r
42114 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
\r
42117 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42121 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42129 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42134 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
\r
42135 in the selected key binding file.
\r
42138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
\r
42139 Editing Shortcuts
\r
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42141 LatexCommand label
\r
42142 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
\r
42147 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42151 Key Bindings ! Editing
\r
42159 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42160 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
\r
42161 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
\r
42162 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
\r
42163 provides the field
\r
42165 Show key-bindings containing
\r
42168 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
\r
42169 Insert there for example as keyword
\r
42170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42177 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
\r
42178 functions that contain
\r
42179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42187 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
\r
42188 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
\r
42192 that you will find in the
\r
42199 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42200 For example, to add the shortcut
\r
42204 for the function
\r
42208 , select the function and press the
\r
42213 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
\r
42214 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
\r
42217 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42218 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
\r
42219 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
\r
42220 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
\r
42221 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
\r
42222 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
\r
42227 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42228 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
\r
42231 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42232 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
\r
42234 The syntax of the entries is:
\r
42237 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42261 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42264 LatexCommand label
\r
42265 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
\r
42270 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42280 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42284 Settings ! Keyboard Map
\r
42292 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42293 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
\r
42294 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
\r
42295 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
\r
42296 is a Romanian one, you can enable
\r
42299 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42303 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42308 and select the keyboard map file named
\r
42315 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42316 You can specify a
\r
42324 keyboard map and, if you use the
\r
42328 bindings, you can select the first and second with
\r
42329 \begin_inset Info
\r
42331 arg "keymap-primary"
\r
42335 \begin_inset Info
\r
42337 arg "keymap-secondary"
\r
42340 respectively or toggle between them with
\r
42341 \begin_inset Info
\r
42343 arg "keymap-toggle"
\r
42349 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42358 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
\r
42367 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42368 You can also specify the mouse
\r
42370 Wheel scrolling speed
\r
42373 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
\r
42377 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42385 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42389 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42394 you can select a key for zooming.
\r
42395 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
\r
42398 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42402 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42403 Input completion is described in section
\r
42404 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42410 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
\r
42417 \begin_layout Section
\r
42419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42420 LatexCommand label
\r
42426 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42436 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42448 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42449 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
\r
42450 the installation.
\r
42451 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
\r
42454 \begin_layout Description
\r
42456 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42459 directory This is LyX's working directory.
\r
42460 It is the default when you
\r
42471 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42479 \begin_layout Description
\r
42481 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42484 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
\r
42486 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42488 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42492 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42500 \begin_layout Description
\r
42502 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42505 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
\r
42511 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
42515 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
42522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42531 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
\r
42539 \begin_layout Description
\r
42541 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42545 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42549 Backup ! Directory
\r
42554 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
\r
42555 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
\r
42556 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42562 reference "sub:Backup documents"
\r
42568 Working directory
\r
42570 will be used to save the backups.
\r
42571 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42574 Backup files have the ending
\r
42575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42585 \begin_layout Description
\r
42590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42598 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42601 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
\r
42602 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
\r
42603 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42610 You add a BibTeX-database
\r
42614 to your document.
\r
42615 You can edit this file with the program
\r
42616 \family typewriter
\r
42621 \family typewriter
\r
42624 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
\r
42627 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42633 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
\r
42635 \family typewriter
\r
42638 and click on the LyX-symbol.
\r
42639 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
\r
42640 in your LyX file.
\r
42642 \family typewriter
\r
42645 and LyX need to be running the same time.
\r
42646 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42649 The pipe is also used for the
\r
42657 feature, see sec.
\r
42658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42664 reference "sub:Backup documents"
\r
42669 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42672 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
\r
42673 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
42689 \begin_layout Description
\r
42691 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42694 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
\r
42697 \begin_layout Description
\r
42699 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42702 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
\r
42703 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
\r
42704 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
\r
42707 \begin_layout Description
\r
42709 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42712 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
\r
42714 \family typewriter
\r
42718 You only need to specify it if you are using
\r
42719 \family typewriter
\r
42722 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
\r
42724 For LyX on Windows
\r
42725 \family typewriter
\r
42728 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
\r
42732 \begin_layout Description
\r
42734 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42737 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
\r
42738 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
\r
42739 where to find it on the system.
\r
42740 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
\r
42741 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
\r
42743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
42750 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
\r
42751 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
\r
42754 \begin_layout Description
\r
42756 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42759 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
\r
42760 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
\r
42761 document preamble.
\r
42762 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
\r
42763 a single dot '.').
\r
42764 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
\r
42765 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
\r
42766 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
\r
42767 scanned for the input files.
\r
42768 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
\r
42769 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
\r
42770 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
\r
42771 compilation may fail for some documents.
\r
42774 \begin_layout Section
\r
42778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
42779 Here you can insert your
\r
42788 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
\r
42790 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42796 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
\r
42800 , to mark changes you make as yours.
\r
42803 \begin_layout Section
\r
42804 Language Settings
\r
42805 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42809 Language ! Settings
\r
42815 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42819 Settings ! Language
\r
42827 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
42829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
42830 LatexCommand label
\r
42831 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
\r
42838 \begin_layout Description
\r
42840 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42844 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42847 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
\r
42848 You can find its actual translation status here:
\r
42849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
42850 LatexCommand href
\r
42851 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
\r
42858 \begin_layout Description
\r
42860 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42863 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
\r
42865 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
\r
42866 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
\r
42867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
42879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
42883 The most widespread language package is
\r
42888 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42892 LaTeX-packages ! babel
\r
42897 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
\r
42898 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
\r
42899 alternative language package
\r
42904 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
42908 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
\r
42913 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
\r
42914 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
\r
42920 The available selections are described in section
\r
42921 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
42927 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
\r
42934 \begin_layout Description
\r
42936 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42939 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
\r
42940 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
\r
42941 An example is the start command
\r
42947 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
\r
42952 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
42953 LatexCommand cite
\r
42959 The default is the
\r
42967 selectlanguage{$$lang}
\r
42972 \begin_layout Description
\r
42974 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42977 end Counterpart to
\r
42982 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
\r
42983 command toggles the package on and off.
\r
42986 \begin_layout Description
\r
42988 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42992 \begin_inset space ~
\r
42995 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
\r
42999 \begin_layout Description
\r
43001 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43005 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43008 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
\r
43009 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
\r
43010 used by all LaTeX-packages.
\r
43011 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
\r
43018 \begin_layout Description
\r
43020 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43023 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
\r
43025 When this option is not set, the
\r
43028 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43033 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
\r
43034 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
\r
43037 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43042 than the default.
\r
43045 \begin_layout Description
\r
43047 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43050 end Counterpart to
\r
43053 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43059 When it is not set, the
\r
43062 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43067 is set to the end of the document.
\r
43070 \begin_layout Description
\r
43072 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43076 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43079 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
\r
43080 language will be underlined in blue.
\r
43083 \begin_layout Description
\r
43085 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43089 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43092 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
\r
43093 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
\r
43096 \begin_layout Description
\r
43098 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43101 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
\r
43102 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
\r
43103 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
\r
43104 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
\r
43107 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43111 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43112 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
\r
43113 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43119 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
\r
43126 \begin_layout Section
\r
43130 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43134 \begin_layout Description
\r
43136 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43140 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43143 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
\r
43146 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43147 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43149 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43155 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
\r
43158 \begin_layout Description
\r
43160 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43164 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43174 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43178 Settings ! Date format
\r
43183 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
\r
43184 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43188 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
43191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43193 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
\r
43199 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43202 For example the format
\r
43203 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43207 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43210 prints the date as day/month/year.
\r
43213 \begin_layout Description
\r
43215 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43219 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43222 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
\r
43225 \begin_layout Description
\r
43227 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43230 search Commands that will be used for the menu
\r
43232 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43234 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43240 For a detailed description see section
\r
43242 Reverse DVI/PDF search
\r
43247 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43255 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43258 LatexCommand label
\r
43259 name "sub:Printer"
\r
43264 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43274 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43278 Settings ! Printer
\r
43286 \begin_layout Description
\r
43288 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43291 printer Here you can specify the name of your
\r
43296 The name will be used when the
\r
43301 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
43305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
\r
43308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43313 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
\r
43321 \begin_layout Description
\r
43323 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43326 command is the command LyX
\r
43327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
43334 LaTeX uses for printing.
\r
43342 \begin_layout Description
\r
43344 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43348 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43351 Options Here you can specify printer options.
\r
43352 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
\r
43353 of the program that provides the
\r
43360 \begin_layout Description
\r
43362 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43366 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43370 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43373 printer This option works only for the
\r
43378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43390 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
\r
43391 This is an option only for dvips experts.
\r
43394 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43408 LatexCommand label
\r
43409 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
\r
43414 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43426 \begin_layout Description
\r
43428 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43443 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43447 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43450 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
\r
43455 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
\r
43476 are used for Cyrillic.
\r
43477 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
\r
43478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43490 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
\r
43491 LyX sets up in the background.
\r
43492 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
\r
43495 \begin_layout Description
\r
43497 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43501 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43504 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
\r
43509 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
\r
43512 \begin_layout Description
\r
43514 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43518 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43522 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43526 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43529 options They only have an effect when the program
\r
43533 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
\r
43536 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43537 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
\r
43538 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
\r
43539 manuals of the applications.
\r
43542 \begin_layout Description
\r
43544 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43547 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
\r
43548 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43554 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
\r
43561 \begin_layout Description
\r
43563 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43566 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
\r
43567 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43573 reference "sub:Index-Program"
\r
43580 \begin_layout Description
\r
43582 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43585 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
\r
43586 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43592 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
\r
43599 \begin_layout Description
\r
43604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43612 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43615 command Command for the program
\r
43619 that is described in the section
\r
43625 Additional Features
\r
43630 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43631 There are additionally the following options:
\r
43634 \begin_layout Description
\r
43636 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43640 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43644 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43648 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43652 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43655 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
\r
43656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43665 is used instead of
\r
43666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
\r
43670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
\r
43673 to separate folders.
\r
43674 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
\r
43675 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43685 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43697 \begin_layout Description
\r
43699 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43703 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43707 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43711 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43715 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43719 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43722 changes Removes all manually set
\r
43728 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43729 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\r
43731 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43736 dialog when changing the document class.
\r
43739 \begin_layout Section
\r
43741 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43745 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43757 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43760 LatexCommand label
\r
43761 name "sub:Converters"
\r
43766 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43779 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
\r
43780 from one format to another.
\r
43781 You can modify converters or create new ones.
\r
43782 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
\r
43789 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43794 field and press the
\r
43799 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
\r
43803 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43808 drop-down list, modify the
\r
43812 field and press the
\r
43819 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43822 Converter File Cache
\r
43828 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
\r
43830 Maximum Age (in days
\r
43833 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
\r
43834 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
\r
43837 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43838 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
\r
43839 definition, is described in the section
\r
43850 \begin_layout Subsection
\r
43852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43853 LatexCommand label
\r
43854 name "sec:File-Formats"
\r
43859 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43869 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43881 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43882 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
\r
43883 You can modify the
\r
43891 programs that should be used for certain formats.
\r
43894 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43895 You can also define the
\r
43897 Default output format
\r
43899 that is used when you use
\r
43901 View, Update, View Master Document
\r
43905 Update Master Document
\r
43911 menu or the toolbar.
\r
43914 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43915 More about formats and their options is described in the section
\r
43926 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43927 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
\r
43928 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
\r
43929 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
\r
43930 This is done by specifying a
\r
43935 More about this is described in the section
\r
43946 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
43947 Units available in LyX
\r
43948 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
43951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43959 LatexCommand label
\r
43960 name "chap:Units-available-in"
\r
43967 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43969 \begin_inset space ~
\r
43973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
\r
43975 reference "tab:Units"
\r
43979 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
\r
43982 \begin_layout Standard
\r
43983 \begin_inset Float table
\r
43989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43990 \begin_inset Caption Standard
\r
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
43993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
43994 LatexCommand label
\r
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44008 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
\r
44014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44016 \begin_inset Tabular
\r
44017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
\r
44018 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
\r
44019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
44020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
\r
44022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44023 \begin_inset Text
\r
44025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44032 \begin_inset Text
\r
44034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44043 \begin_inset Text
\r
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44052 \begin_inset Text
\r
44054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44063 \begin_inset Text
\r
44065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44072 \begin_inset Text
\r
44074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44083 \begin_inset Text
\r
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44092 \begin_inset Text
\r
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44103 \begin_inset Text
\r
44105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44112 \begin_inset Text
\r
44114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44131 \begin_inset Text
\r
44133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44140 \begin_inset Text
\r
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44159 \begin_inset Text
\r
44161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44168 \begin_inset Text
\r
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44171 scaled point (65536
\r
44172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44187 \begin_inset Text
\r
44189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44196 \begin_inset Text
\r
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44215 \begin_inset Text
\r
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44224 \begin_inset Text
\r
44226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44232 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
\r
44236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44247 \begin_inset Text
\r
44249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44256 \begin_inset Text
\r
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44275 \begin_inset Text
\r
44277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44284 \begin_inset Text
\r
44286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44287 % of original image width
\r
44294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44295 \begin_inset Text
\r
44297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44304 \begin_inset Text
\r
44306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44315 \begin_inset Text
\r
44317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44324 \begin_inset Text
\r
44326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44327 % of column width
\r
44334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44335 \begin_inset Text
\r
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44344 \begin_inset Text
\r
44346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44355 \begin_inset Text
\r
44357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44364 \begin_inset Text
\r
44366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44375 \begin_inset Text
\r
44377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44384 \begin_inset Text
\r
44386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44395 \begin_inset Text
\r
44397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44404 \begin_inset Text
\r
44406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44407 % of paper height
\r
44414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44415 \begin_inset Text
\r
44417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44424 \begin_inset Text
\r
44426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44427 height of letter
\r
44438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44439 \begin_inset Text
\r
44441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44448 \begin_inset Text
\r
44450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44463 \begin_inset Text
\r
44465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
\r
44472 \begin_inset Text
\r
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\r
44501 \begin_layout Chapter
\r
44503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
\r
44504 LatexCommand label
\r
44505 name "chap:Credits"
\r
44512 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44513 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
\r
44514 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
\r
44517 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44520 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
\r
44523 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44529 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44535 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44541 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44547 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44553 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44559 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44565 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44568 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
\r
44571 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44577 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44583 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44589 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44595 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44601 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44607 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44613 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44619 \begin_layout Itemize
\r
44621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
\r
44622 LatexCommand cite
\r
44630 \begin_layout Standard
\r
44631 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
\r
44634 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
\r
44641 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44643 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44651 LatexCommand href
\r
44653 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
\r
44658 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44662 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44667 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
\r
44675 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44677 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44678 key "latexcompanion"
\r
44682 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
\r
44684 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
\r
44687 Addison-Wesley, 2004
\r
44690 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44691 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44692 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44697 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
\r
44700 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
\r
44703 Addison-Wesley, 2003
\r
44706 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44708 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44715 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
\r
44718 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
\r
44721 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44723 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44735 Addison-Wesley, 1984
\r
44738 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44740 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44741 key "TeXCatalogue"
\r
44745 The TeX Catalogue:
\r
44746 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44750 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44755 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
\r
44763 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44765 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44771 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44775 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44780 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
\r
44788 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44789 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44790 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44797 LatexCommand href
\r
44798 name "Documentation"
\r
44799 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
\r
44808 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44812 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44817 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
\r
44825 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44826 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44827 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44834 LatexCommand href
\r
44835 name "Documentation"
\r
44836 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
\r
44840 how to use the program
\r
44845 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44849 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44854 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
\r
44862 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44863 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44864 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44870 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44871 LatexCommand href
\r
44872 name "Documentation"
\r
44873 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
\r
44882 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44886 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44891 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
\r
44899 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44901 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44908 LatexCommand href
\r
44909 name "Documentation"
\r
44910 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
\r
44919 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44923 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44928 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
\r
44936 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44937 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44938 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44945 LatexCommand href
\r
44946 name "Documentation"
\r
44947 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
\r
44951 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
\r
44952 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
44956 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
44959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44961 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
\r
44969 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
44970 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
44971 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
44977 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
44978 LatexCommand href
\r
44979 name "Documentation"
\r
44980 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
\r
44984 of the LaTeX-package
\r
44989 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
44993 LaTeX-packages ! caption
\r
44999 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45003 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45008 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
\r
45016 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45017 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45018 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45025 LatexCommand href
\r
45026 name "Documentation"
\r
45027 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
\r
45031 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45036 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45040 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
\r
45046 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45050 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45055 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
\r
45063 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45064 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45065 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45072 LatexCommand href
\r
45073 name "Documentation"
\r
45074 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
\r
45078 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45083 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45087 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
\r
45093 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45097 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45102 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
\r
45110 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45111 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45112 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45118 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45119 LatexCommand href
\r
45120 name "Documentation"
\r
45121 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
\r
45125 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45130 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45134 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
\r
45140 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45144 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45149 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
\r
45157 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45159 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45166 LatexCommand href
\r
45167 name "Documentation"
\r
45168 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
\r
45172 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45177 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45181 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
\r
45187 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45191 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45196 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
\r
45204 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45206 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45213 LatexCommand href
\r
45214 name "Documentation"
\r
45215 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
\r
45219 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45224 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45228 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
\r
45234 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45238 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45243 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
\r
45251 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45253 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45260 LatexCommand href
\r
45261 name "Documentation"
\r
45262 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
\r
45266 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45271 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45275 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
\r
45281 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45285 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45290 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
\r
45298 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45299 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45300 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45307 LatexCommand href
\r
45308 name "Documentation"
\r
45309 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
\r
45313 of the LaTeX-package
\r
45318 \begin_inset Index idx
\r
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45322 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
\r
45328 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45332 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45337 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
\r
45345 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45347 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45354 LatexCommand href
\r
45356 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
\r
45360 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
\r
45361 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45365 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45370 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
\r
45378 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45379 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45380 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45387 LatexCommand href
\r
45389 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
\r
45393 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
\r
45394 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45398 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45403 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
\r
45411 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45413 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45420 LatexCommand href
\r
45422 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
\r
45426 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
\r
45427 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45431 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45436 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
\r
45444 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45446 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45453 LatexCommand href
\r
45455 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
\r
45459 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
\r
45460 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45464 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45469 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
\r
45477 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45479 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45486 LatexCommand href
\r
45488 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
\r
45492 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
\r
45493 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45497 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45502 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
\r
45510 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45512 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45518 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45519 LatexCommand href
\r
45521 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
\r
45525 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
\r
45526 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45530 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45535 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
\r
45543 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45544 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45545 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45552 LatexCommand href
\r
45554 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
\r
45558 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
\r
45559 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45563 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45568 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
\r
45576 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45577 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45578 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45585 LatexCommand href
\r
45587 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
\r
45591 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
\r
45592 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45596 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45601 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
\r
45609 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45611 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45617 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45618 LatexCommand href
\r
45620 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
\r
45624 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
\r
45625 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45629 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45634 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
\r
45642 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45644 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45651 LatexCommand href
\r
45653 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
\r
45657 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
\r
45658 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45662 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45667 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
\r
45675 \begin_layout Bibliography
\r
45676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
\r
45677 LatexCommand bibitem
\r
45683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
\r
45684 LatexCommand href
\r
45686 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
\r
45690 about new features in
\r
45695 \begin_inset Newline newline
\r
45699 \begin_inset Flex URL
\r
45702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45704 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
\r
45712 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45713 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
\r
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45747 \begin_inset Note Note
\r
45750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
\r
45757 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
\r
45758 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
\r
45759 bibliography is the second one:
\r
45767 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45768 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
\r
45769 LatexCommand bibtex
\r
45770 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
\r
45771 options "biblio/alphadin"
\r
45778 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45779 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
\r
45782 \begin_layout Standard
\r
45783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
\r
45784 LatexCommand printnomenclature
\r
45790 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
\r
45791 LatexCommand printindex
\r